ZyXEL Communications AMG1302 Wireless N ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway User Manual AMG1302 T10A UG rev1

ZyXEL Communications Corporation Wireless N ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway AMG1302 T10A UG rev1

AMG1302-T10A_UG_rev1

Download: ZyXEL Communications AMG1302 Wireless N ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway User Manual AMG1302 T10A UG rev1
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]ZyXEL Communications AMG1302 Wireless N ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway User Manual AMG1302 T10A UG rev1
Document ID1700682
Application ID1gOLvNIJqSyHOp6mjX9KCA==
Document DescriptionAMG1302-T10A_UG_rev1
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize443.25kB (5540634 bits)
Date Submitted2012-05-17 00:00:00
Date Available2012-05-22 00:00:00
Creation Date2012-05-15 14:08:06
Producing Softwarewww.adultpdf.com
Document Lastmod2012-05-15 14:26:30
Document TitleAMG1302-T10A_UG_rev1

AMG1302-T10A
Wireless N ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway
Default Login Details
LAN IP
Address
https://192.168.1.1
Password
Version 1.00
Edition 1, 2/2012
1234
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY
BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE
FOR FUTURE
REFERENCE.
www.zyxel.com
www.zyxel.com
Copyright © 2012
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Graphics in this book may differ slightly from the product due to differences in operating systems,
operating system versions, or if you installed updated firmware/software for your device. Every
effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate.
Related Documentation
• Quick
tart Guide
The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the Device and access the Web Configurator
wizards. (See the wizard real time help for information on configuring each screen.) It also
contains a connection diagram.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
User’s Guide .......................................................................................................................................13
Introduction .............................................................................................................................................15
The Web Configurator .............................................................................................................................21
Status Screens ........................................................................................................................................27
Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................................31
Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................53
Internet Setup Wizard ............................................................................................................................. 55
WAN Setup .............................................................................................................................................69
LAN Setup ...............................................................................................................................................85
Wireless LAN ..........................................................................................................................................97
Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................................127
Firewalls ................................................................................................................................................141
Filters ....................................................................................................................................................153
Static Route ...........................................................................................................................................159
Port Binding ...........................................................................................................................................163
PVID Setting ..........................................................................................................................................167
Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................169
Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................................177
Remote Management ............................................................................................................................179
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ...........................................................................................................187
CWMP ...................................................................................................................................................199
System Settings ....................................................................................................................................203
Logs ......................................................................................................................................................207
Tools ......................................................................................................................................................217
Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................223
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................227
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Contents Overview
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5
Part I: User’s Guide ......................................................................................... 13
Chapter 1
Introduction.........................................................................................................................................15
1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................15
1.2 Ways to Manage the Device .............................................................................................................15
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device ..............................................................................................15
1.4 Applications for the Device ................................................................................................................16
1.4.1 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................16
1.5 Wireless Access ................................................................................................................................16
1.5.1 Using the WPS/WLAN Button .................................................................................................17
1.6 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................................18
1.7 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................19
1.7.1 Using the Reset Button ............................................................................................................19
Chapter 2
The Web Configurator ........................................................................................................................21
2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................21
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................21
2.2 The Main Screen ...............................................................................................................................23
2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................23
2.2.2 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................24
2.2.3 Main Window ...........................................................................................................................25
2.2.4 Status Bar ................................................................................................................................26
Chapter 3
Status Screens ....................................................................................................................................27
3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................27
3.2 The Status Screen .............................................................................................................................28
Chapter 4
Tutorials ...............................................................................................................................................31
4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................31
4.2 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network .............................................................................................31
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Table of Contents
4.2.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings .............................................................................31
4.2.2 Using WPS ..............................................................................................................................33
4.2.3 Without WPS ...........................................................................................................................36
4.2.4 Setting Up Wireless Network Scheduling ................................................................................37
4.3 Configuring the MAC Address Filter ..................................................................................................38
4.4 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network .................................................................40
4.5 Multiple Public and Private IP Address Mappings .............................................................................42
4.5.1 Full Feature NAT + Many-to-Many No Overload Mapping ......................................................43
4.5.2 Full Feature NAT + One-to-One Mapping ................................................................................44
4.6 Firewall Rule to Allow a Specified Service ........................................................................................46
4.7 Port BindingConfiguration ................................................................................................................48
4.7.1 Configuring ATM QoS for Multiple WAN Connections .............................................................48
4.7.2 Configuring Port Binding ..........................................................................................................51
Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 53
Chapter 5
Internet Setup Wizard .........................................................................................................................55
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................55
5.2 Internet Access Wizard Setup ...........................................................................................................55
5.2.1 Manual Configuration ..............................................................................................................58
5.3 Wireless Connection Wizard Setup ...................................................................................................63
5.3.1 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key ............................................................................................66
5.3.2 Manually Assign a WEP Key ...................................................................................................66
Chapter 6
WAN Setup ..........................................................................................................................................69
6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................69
6.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens ...................................................................................69
6.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN ......................................................................................69
6.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................70
6.2 The Internet Access Setup Screen ...................................................................................................71
6.2.1 Advanced Internet Access Setup ............................................................................................74
6.3 The More Connections Screen .........................................................................................................75
6.3.1 More Connections Edit ............................................................................................................77
6.3.2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup .....................................................................79
6.4 WAN Technical Reference ................................................................................................................80
6.4.1 Encapsulation ..........................................................................................................................80
6.4.2 Multiplexing ..............................................................................................................................81
6.4.3 VPI and VCI .............................................................................................................................81
6.4.4 IP Address Assignment ...........................................................................................................81
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Table of Contents
6.4.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) ...................................................................................................82
6.4.6 NAT ..........................................................................................................................................82
6.5 Traffic Shaping ..................................................................................................................................82
6.5.1 ATM Traffic Classes .................................................................................................................83
Chapter 7
LAN Setup ...........................................................................................................................................85
7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................85
7.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens ....................................................................................85
7.1.2 What You Need To Know About LAN ......................................................................................85
7.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................86
7.2 The LAN IP Screen ...........................................................................................................................86
7.2.1 The Advanced LAN IP Setup Screen ......................................................................................87
7.3 The DHCP Server Screen .................................................................................................................88
7.4 The Client List Screen .......................................................................................................................89
7.5 The IP Alias Screen ..........................................................................................................................90
7.5.1 Configuring the LAN IP Alias Screen .......................................................................................91
7.6 The IPv6 Screen ...............................................................................................................................92
7.7 LAN Technical Reference ..................................................................................................................93
7.7.1 LANs, WANs and the Device ...................................................................................................93
7.7.2 DHCP Setup ............................................................................................................................93
7.7.3 DNS Server Addresses ...........................................................................................................94
7.7.4 LAN TCP/IP .............................................................................................................................94
7.7.5 RIP Setup ................................................................................................................................95
7.7.6 Multicast ..................................................................................................................................96
Chapter 8
Wireless LAN.......................................................................................................................................97
8.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................97
8.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens .....................................................................97
8.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless ................................................................................98
8.1.3 Before You Start .......................................................................................................................98
8.2 The AP Screen ..................................................................................................................................99
8.2.1 No Security ............................................................................................................................100
8.2.2 WEP Encryption ....................................................................................................................100
8.2.3 WPA(2)-PSK ..........................................................................................................................102
8.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication ...........................................................................................................103
8.2.5 Wireless LAN Advanced Setup .............................................................................................104
8.2.6 MAC Filter
..........................................................................................................................106
8.3 The More AP Screen .......................................................................................................................106
8.3.1 More AP Edit .........................................................................................................................107
8.4 The WPS Screen ............................................................................................................................108
8.5 The WPS Station Screen ................................................................................................................109
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Table of Contents
8.6 The WDS Screen ............................................................................................................................ 110
8.7 The Scheduling Screen ................................................................................................................... 112
8.8 Wireless LAN Technical Reference ................................................................................................. 112
8.8.1 Wireless Network Overview ................................................................................................... 113
8.8.2 Additional Wireless Terms ..................................................................................................... 114
8.8.3 Wireless Security Overview ................................................................................................... 114
8.8.4 Signal Problems .................................................................................................................... 117
8.8.5 BSS ....................................................................................................................................... 117
8.8.6 MBSSID ................................................................................................................................. 118
8.8.7 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) ..................................................................................... 118
8.8.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ................................................................................................. 118
Chapter 9
Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................127
9.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................127
9.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens ..................................................................................127
9.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT ....................................................................................127
9.2 The NAT General Setup Screen .....................................................................................................128
9.3 The Port Forwarding Screen ...........................................................................................................129
9.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen ...............................................................................130
9.3.2 The Port Forwarding Rule Edit Screen ..................................................................................132
9.4 The Address Mapping Screen .........................................................................................................133
9.4.1 The Address Mapping Rule Edit Screen ...............................................................................134
9.5 The ALG Screen .............................................................................................................................135
9.6 NAT Technical Reference ................................................................................................................136
9.6.1 NAT Definitions ......................................................................................................................136
9.6.2 What NAT Does .....................................................................................................................137
9.6.3 How NAT Works ....................................................................................................................137
9.6.4 NAT Application .....................................................................................................................138
9.6.5 NAT Mapping Types ..............................................................................................................138
Chapter 10
Firewalls ............................................................................................................................................141
10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................141
10.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens ...........................................................................141
10.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall ..............................................................................141
10.2 The Firewall General Screen ........................................................................................................142
10.3 The Firewall Rule Screen ..............................................................................................................143
10.3.1 Configuring Firewall Rules .................................................................................................146
10.3.2 Customized Services ..........................................................................................................147
10.3.3 Configuring a Customized Service
....................................................................................148
10.4 Firewall Technical Reference ........................................................................................................149
10.4.1 Firewall Rules Overview ......................................................................................................149
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Table of Contents
10.4.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall .......................................................150
10.4.3 Security Considerations .......................................................................................................150
10.4.4 Triangle Route .....................................................................................................................151
Chapter 11
Filters .................................................................................................................................................153
11.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................153
11.1.1 What You Can Do in the Filter Screens ...............................................................................153
11.1.2 What You Need to Know About Filtering ..............................................................................153
11.2 The URL Filter Screen ..................................................................................................................154
11.3 The Application Filter Screen ........................................................................................................154
11.4 The IP/MAC Filter Screen .............................................................................................................156
Chapter 12
Static Route .......................................................................................................................................159
12.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................159
12.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens ....................................................................160
12.2 The Static Route Screen ...............................................................................................................160
12.2.1 Static Route Edit
................................................................................................................161
Chapter 13
Port Binding ......................................................................................................................................163
13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................163
13.1.1 What You Can Do in the Port Binding Screens ...................................................................164
13.2 The Port Binding Screen ...............................................................................................................164
13.2.1 Port Binding Summary screen .............................................................................................165
Chapter 14
PVID Setting ......................................................................................................................................167
14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................167
14.1.1 What You Can Do in the pvid Setting Screen ......................................................................167
14.1.2 What You Need to Know About 802.1Q ..............................................................................167
14.2 The pvid Setting Screen ................................................................................................................168
Chapter 15
Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................169
15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................169
15.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens ................................................................................169
15.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS ...................................................................................170
15.2 The QoS Screen ..........................................................................................................................170
15.2.1 The QoS Settings Summary Screen ...................................................................................173
15.3 QoS Technical Reference .............................................................................................................174
15.3.1 IEEE 802.1p ........................................................................................................................174
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Table of Contents
15.3.2 IP Precedence .....................................................................................................................174
15.3.3 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment .................................................................................175
Chapter 16
Dynamic DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................177
16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................177
16.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen ...............................................................................177
16.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS ...............................................................................177
16.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................178
Chapter 17
Remote Management........................................................................................................................179
17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................179
17.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens ....................................................180
17.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management ........................................................180
17.2 The WWW Screen ........................................................................................................................181
17.2.1 Configuring the WWW Screen .............................................................................................181
17.3 The Telnet Screen .........................................................................................................................181
17.4 The FTP Screen ............................................................................................................................182
17.5 The SNMP Screen ........................................................................................................................183
17.5.1 Configuring SNMP ...............................................................................................................184
17.6 The DNS Screen ..........................................................................................................................185
17.7 The ICMP Screen ..........................................................................................................................185
Chapter 18
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)......................................................................................................187
18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................187
18.1.1 What You Can Do in the UPnP Screen ...............................................................................187
18.1.2 What You Need to Know About UPnP .................................................................................187
18.2 The UPnP Screen .........................................................................................................................188
18.3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example ...........................................................................................189
18.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ..........................................................................................192
Chapter 19
CWMP ................................................................................................................................................199
19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................199
19.2 The CWMP Setup Screen .............................................................................................................200
Chapter 20
System Settings................................................................................................................................203
20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................203
20.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens .............................................................203
20.2 The General Screen ......................................................................................................................203
10
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Table of Contents
20.3 The Time and Date Screen ..........................................................................................................204
Chapter 21
Logs ...................................................................................................................................................207
21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................207
21.1.1 What You Need To Know About Logs ..................................................................................207
21.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................207
21.3 Log Descriptions ...........................................................................................................................209
Chapter 22
Tools ..................................................................................................................................................217
22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................217
22.1.1 What You Can Do in the Tool Screens ................................................................................217
22.2 The Firmware Screen ....................................................................................................................217
22.3 The Configuration Screen .............................................................................................................219
22.4 The Restart Screen .......................................................................................................................221
Chapter 23
Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................223
23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................223
23.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens ......................................................................223
23.2 The General Screen ......................................................................................................................223
23.3 The DSL Line Screen ....................................................................................................................224
Chapter 24
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................227
24.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................227
24.2 Device Access and Login ..............................................................................................................228
24.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................229
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address .......................................................................231
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting.......................................................................................251
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions .................................................259
Appendix D Wireless LANs..............................................................................................................267
Appendix E IPv6 ..............................................................................................................................281
Appendix F Services........................................................................................................................291
Appendix G Legal Information .........................................................................................................295
Safety Warnings................................................................................................................................321
Index ..................................................................................................................................................323
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
11
Table of Contents
12
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
P ART I
User’s Guide
13
14
C HAPT ER
Introduction
1.1 Overview
The Device is a high speed ADSL2+ 802.11n wireless router with built-in switch, firewall and
content filtering. You are provided with ease of installation and shared Internet access. The robust
firewall and content filtering features make the Device a complete security solution.
Only use firmware for your Device’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your Device.
Note: All screens displayed in this user’s guide are from the AMG1302-T10A model.
1.2 Ways to Manage the Device
Use any of the following methods to manage the Device.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Device using a
(supported) web browser.
• Command Line Interface. Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service
engineers.
• FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore.
• TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device.
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device
Do the following things regularly to make the Device more secure and to manage the Device more
effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s easy to guess and that consists of different types of
characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier
working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you
forget your password, you will have to reset the Device to its factory default settings. If you
backed up an earlier configuration file, you would have to totally re-configure the Device. You
could simply restore your last configuration.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
15
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.4 Applications for the Device
Here are some example uses for which the Device is well suited.
1.4.1 Internet Access
Your Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM
jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. Computers can connect to the Device’s LAN ports (or
wirelessly).
Figure 1 Device’s Router Features
LAN
DSL
You can also configure firewall and content filtering feature on the Device for secure Internet
access. When the firewall is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked
unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network
are allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files.
Use the filtering feature to block access to specific web sites or Internet applications such as MSN or
Yahoo Messenger. You can also configure IP/MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic.
Use QoS to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic
and/or to particular computers. For example, you could make sure that the Device gives voice over
Internet calls high priority, and/or limit bandwidth devoted to the boss’s excessive file downloading.
1.5 Wireless Access
The Device is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebooks, computers or
PDAs and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient
Ethernet cables.
16
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introduction
You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS
button.
Figure 2 Wireless Access Example
1.5.1 Using the WPS/WLAN Button
Use the WPS/WLAN button on the Device to activate and deactivate wireless. To turn it on, simply
press the WPS/WLAN button for 1 second. Once the WPS/WLAN LED turns green, the wireless
network is active.
You can also use the WPS/WLAN button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between
the Device and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time.
To activate WPS:
Make sure the POWER LED is on and blinking.
Press the WPS/WLAN button for five to ten seconds and release it.
Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the Device. The WPS/WLAN
LED should flash while the Device sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device.
Once the connection is successfully made, the WPS/WLAN LED shines green.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
17
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.6 LEDs (Lights)
The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs.
Figure 3 LEDs
None of the LEDs are on if the Device is receiving power.
Table 1 LED Descriptions
LED
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
POWER
Green
On
The Device is receiving power and ready for use.
Blinking
The Device is self-testing.
On
The Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device
malfunction.
Off
The Device is receiving power.
On
The Device has an Ethernet connection with a device on the Local
Area Network (LAN).
Blinking
The Device is sending/receiving data to /from the LAN.
Off
The Device does have an Ethernet connection with the LAN.
On
The wireless network is activated.
Blinking
The Device is communicating with other wireless clients.
Blinking
The Device is setting up a WPS connection.
Off
The wireless network is activated.
Red
LAN 1-4
WPS/WLAN
Green
Green
Red
DSL
INTERNET
Green
Green
On
The DSL line is up.
Blinking
The Device is initializing the DSL line.
Off
The DSL line is down.
On
The Device has an IP connection but no traffic.
Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a
DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used)
and the DSL connection is up.
Red
Blinking
The Device is sending or receiving IP traffic.
On
The Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible
causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response,
PPPoE authentication failed.
Off
The Device does have an IP connection.
Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections.
18
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.7 The RESET Button
If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET
button at the back of the device to reload thefactory-default configuration file. This means that you
will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to “1234”.
1.7.1 Using the Reset Button
Make sure the POWER LED is on (blinking).
To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or
until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink,
the defaults have been restored and the device restarts.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
19
Chapter 1 Introduction
20
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
The Web Configurator
2.1 Overview
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and
management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7.0
and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in
Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
See Appendix C on page 259 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet
Explorer.
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator
Make sure your Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide).
Launch your web browser.
Type "192.168.1.1" as the URL.
A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the Device,
type the admin password (1234 by default) in the password screen and click Login. Click Cancel to
revert to the default user password in the password field. If you have changed the password, enter
your password and click Login.
Figure 4 Password Screen
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
21
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
The following screen displays if you have yet changed your password. It is strongly recommended
you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and click Apply;
alternatively click Ignore to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password
now.
Figure 5 Change Password Screen
Select Go to Wizard setup and click Apply to display the wizard main screen. Otherwise, select
Go to Advanced setup and click Apply to display the Status screen.
Figure 6 Replace Factory Default Certificate Screen
Note: For security reasons, the Device automatically logs you out if you do not use the
web configurator for five minutes (default). If this happens, log in again.
22
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
2.2 The Main Screen
Figure 7 Main Screen
As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
• A - title bar
• B - navigation panel
• C - main window
• D - status bar
2.2.1 Title Bar
The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
23
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
The icons provide the following functions.
Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Wizards: Click this icon to go to the configuration wizards. See Chapter 5 on page
55 for more information.
Logout: Click this icon to log out of the web configurator.
2.2.2 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Device features. The
following tables describe each menu item.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK
TAB
Status
FUNCTION
This screen shows the Device’s general device and network status
information. Use this screen to access the statistics and client list.
Network
WAN
LAN
Wireless LAN
NAT
Internet Access
Setup
Use this screen to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address
assignment, and other advanced properties.
More
Connections
Use this screen to configure additional WAN connections.
IP
Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced
properties.
DHCP Server
Use this screen to configure LAN DHCP settings and DNS server.
Client List
Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always
assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses (and host
names).
IP Alias
Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into subnets.
IPv6
Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings on the Device’s LAN
interface.
AP
Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN
authentication/security settings.
More AP
Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the Device.
WPS
Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup) settings.
WPS Station
Use this screen to set up a WPS wireless network.
WDS
Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System links to other
access points.
Scheduling
Use this screen to configure the dates/times to enable or disable the
wireless LAN.
General
Use this screen to enable NAT.
Port Forwarding
Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world.
ALG
Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG.
General
Use this screen to set the default action that the firewall takes on
packets depending on packet direction.
Rules
Use this screen to view the configured firewall rules and add, edit or
remove a firewall rule.
Security
Firewall
24
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK
Filter
TAB
FUNCTION
URL Filter
Use this screen to block access to certain URL web sites.
Application
Filter
Use this screen to allow or block traffic from certain applications.
IP/MAC Filter
Use this screen to configure IP/MAC filtering rules for incoming or
outgoing traffic.
Advanced
Static Route
Use this screen to configure IP static routes to tell your device about
networks beyond the directly connected remote nodes.
Port Binding
Use this screen to configure and view port binding groups.
pvid Setting
QoS
Use this screen to configure 802.1Q settings.
General
Dynamic DNS
Remote MGMT
UPnP
Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also
configure the QoS rules and actions.
This screen allows you to use a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP
address.
WWW
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which
IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the Device.
Telnet
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which
IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the Device.
FTP
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which
IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the Device.
SNMP
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which
IP address(es) users can access the SNMP agent on the Device.
DNS
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which
IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the Device.
ICMP
Use this screen to set whether or not your device will respond to pings
and probes for services that you have not made available.
General
Use this screen to turn UPnP on or off.
CWMP
Use this screen to have a management server manage the Device with
TR-069.
Maintenance
System
General
Use this screen to configure your device’s password.
Time and Date
Use this screen to change your Device’s time and date.
Logs
System Log
Use this screen to select which logs your device is to record.
Tools
Firmware
Use this screen to upload firmware to your device.
Configuration
Use this screen to backup and restore your device’s configuration
(settings) or reset the factory default settings.
Restart
This screen allows you to reboot the Device without turning the power
off.
Diagnostic
General
Use this screen to test the connections to other devices.
DSL Line
This screen displays information to help you identify problems with the
DSL connection.
2.2.3 Main Window
The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this
document.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
25
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Right after you log in, the Status screen is displayed. See Chapter 3 on page 27 for more
information about the Status screen.
2.2.4 Status Bar
Check the status bar when you click Apply or OK to verify that the configuration has been updated.
26
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Status Screens
3.1 Overview
Use the Status screens to look at the current status of the device, system resources, and
interfaces (LAN and WAN). The Status screen also provides detailed information from DHCP and
statistics from bandwidth management, and traffic.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
27
Chapter 3 Status Screens
3.2 The Status Screen
Use this screen to view the status of the Device. Click Status to open this screen.
Figure 8 Status Screen
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 4 Status Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval
Select how often you want the Device to update this screen.
Apply
Click this to update this screen immediately.
Device Information
28
Host Name
This field displays the Device system name. It is used for identification.
Model Number
This is the model name of your device.
MAC Address
This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your Device.
ZyNOS
Firmware
Version
This is the current version of the firmware inside the device. Click this to go to the
screen where you can change it.
DSL Firmware
Version
This is the current version of the device’s DSL modem code.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Status Screens
Table 4 Status Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IPv4 WAN Information
DSL Mode
This is the DSL standard that your Device is using.
Annex Type
IP Address
This is the current IP address of the Device in the WAN. Click this to go to the screen
where you can change it.If Connect Manually is enabled in Internet Access Setup,
you can click Connect to connect to the WAN.
IP Subnet Mask
This is the current subnet mask in the WAN.
Default
Gateway
This is the IP address of the default gateway, if applicable.
VPI/VCI
This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the
wizard or WAN screen.
IPv6 WAN Information
DSL Mode
This is the DSL standard that your Device is using.
IPv6 Address
This is the current IPv6 address of the Device in the WAN. Click this to go to the screen
where you can change it.
Default
Gateway
This is the IPv6 address of the default gateway, if applicable.
VPI/VCI
This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the
wizard or WAN screen.
IPv4 LAN Information
IP Address
This is the current IP address of the Device in the LAN. Click this to go to the screen
where you can change it.
IP Subnet Mask
This is the current subnet mask in the LAN.
DHCP
This field displays what DHCP services the Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:
Server - The Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other
computers in the LAN.
Relay - The Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and
responses between the remote server and the clients.
None - The Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN.
Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.
IPv6 LAN
Information
IPv6 Address
This is the current IPv6 address of the Device in the LAN. Click this to go to the screen
where you can change it.
WLAN Information
ESSID
This is the descriptive name used to identify the Device in a wireless LAN. Click this to
go to the screen where you can change it.
Channel
This is the channel number used by the Device now.
Security
This displays the type of security mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN.
WPS
This displays whether WPS is activated. Click this to go to the screen where you can
configure the settings.
Status
This displays whether WLAN is activated.
Security
Firewall
This displays whether or not the Device’s firewall is activated. Click this to go to the
screen where you can change it.
System Status
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
29
Chapter 3 Status Screens
Table 4 Status Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
System Uptime
This field displays how long the Device has been running since it last started up. The
Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Tools >
Restart), or when you reset it.
Current Date/
Time
This field displays the current date and time in the Device. You can change this in
Maintenance > System > Time Setting.
System Mode
This displays whether the Device is functioning as a router or a bridge.
CPU Usage
This field displays what percentage of the Device’s processing ability is currently used.
When this percentage is close to 100%, the Device is running at full load, and the
throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have
more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see
Chapter 15 on page 169).
Memory Usage
This field displays what percentage of the Device’s memory is currently used. Usually,
this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%,
the Device is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See
Section 22.4 on page 221, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds.
Interface Status
Interface
This column displays each interface the Device has.
Status
This field indicates whether or not the Device is using the interface.
For the DSL interface, this field displays Down (line is down), Up (line is up or
connected) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Down (line is down), Up (line is
up or connected), Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop
(dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation.
For the LAN interface, this field displays Up when the Device is using the interface and
Down when the Device is not using the interface.
For the WLAN interface, it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive when
WLAN is disabled.
Rate
For the LAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting.
For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate.
For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is
enabled or N/A when WLAN is disabled.
30
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Tutorials
4.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to use the Device’s various features.
• Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 31
• Configuring the MAC Address Filter, see page 38
• Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 40
• Multiple Public and Private IP Address Mappings, see page 42
• Firewall Rule to Allow a Specified Service, see page 46
• Port BindingConfiguration, see page 48
4.2 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network
Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet.
In this wireless network, the Device serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the
wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP.
Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the Device. Then he can set up a wireless
network using WPS (Section 4.2.2 on page 33) or manual configuration (Section 4.2.3 on page 36).
4.2.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings
This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network.
SSID
Example
Security Mode
WPA2-PSK with WPA Compatible
Pre-Shared Key
DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork
802.11 Mode
802.11b+g+n
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
31
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the AP screen. Configure the screen using the provided
parameters (see page 31). Click Apply.
Click the Advanced Setup button and select 802.11b+g+n in the 802.11 Mode field. Click
Apply.
Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and
the Device (see Section 4.2.2 on page 33). He can also use the notebook’s wireless client to search
for the Device (see Section 4.2.3 on page 36).
32
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4.2.2 Using WPS
This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. It uses the Device as the AP
and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook.
Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter
or PCMCIA card).
There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:
• Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two
methods.
• PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the Device. A wireless
client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the
Device.
Push Button Configuration (PBC)
Make sure that your Device is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless
signal.
Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook.
In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button
(Start or WPS button).
Push and hold the WPS button located on the Device’s rear panel for more than 5 seconds.
Alternatively, you may log into Device’s web configurator and click the Push Button in the
Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station screen.
Note: Your Device has a WPS button located on its rear panel as well as a WPS button in
its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function: you can use
one or the other.
Note: It doesn’t matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button
within two minutes of pressing the first one.
The Device sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two
minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the Device securely.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
33
Chapter 4 Tutorials
The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by
pressing a button on both Device and wireless client.
Example WPS Process: PBC Method
Device
Wireless Client
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Press and hold for
5 seconds
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
PIN Configuration
When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the Device’s web configurator
and the wireless client’s utility.
34
Launch your wireless client’s configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method
to get a PIN number.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Enter the PIN number in the PIN field in the Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station screen on
the Device.
Click the Start buttons (or the button next to the PIN field) on boththe wireless client utility screen
and the Device’s WPS Station screen within two minutes.
The Device authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the
wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate
with the Device securely.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
35
Chapter 4 Tutorials
The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a Device and a
wireless client by using PIN method.
Example WPS Process: PIN Method
Wireless Client
Device
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Authentication by PIN
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
4.2.3 Without WPS
Use the wireless adapter’s utility installed on the notebook to search for the “Example” SSID. Then
enter the “DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork” pre-shared key to establish an wireless Internet
connection.
36
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Note: The Device supports IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients. Make sure
that your notebook or computer’s wireless adapter supports one of these
standards.
4.2.4 Setting Up Wireless Network Scheduling
Thomas mostly uses his notebook to access the Internet on weekends; occasionally he uses it at
night on weekdays. Here is how Thomas can set up a schedule to turn on the wireless network at
specific time and days.
Click Network > Wireless Network > Scheduling to open the following screen.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
37
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Configure the screen as follows. In the Everyday row, set the Action to Off. Then set wireless
network from Mondays to Fridays to be On between 18:00 and 23:30. Turn on the wireless network
all day on Saturdays and Sundays. Click Apply.
4.3 Configuring the MAC Address Filter
Thomas iced that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading
media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she can
concentrate on preparing for her final exams.
Josephine’s computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the Device. Thomas can deny
access to the wireless network using the MAC address of Josephine’s computer.
Thomas
Josephine
38
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Click Network > LAN > Client List to open the following screen. Look for the MAC address of
Josephine’s computer.
Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the AP screen. Click the Edit button in the MAC Filter
field.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
39
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Select Enable MAC Filter and Deny Association. Enter the MAC address you found in the Client
List screen. Click Apply.
Josephine will no longer be able to access the Internet through the Device.
4.4 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another
Network
In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to
the Device’s LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial
shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings.
In the following figure, router R is connected to the Device’s LAN. R connects to two networks, N1
(192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1
network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the Device’s WAN default gateway by
default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic.
N1
N2
40
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
You need to specify a static routing rule on the Device to specify R as the router in charge of
forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the Device routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the
traffic to B.
N1
N2
This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:
Table 5 IP Settings in this Tutorial
DEVICE / COMPUTER
IP ADDRESS
The Device’s WAN
172.16.1.1
The Device’s LAN
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.34
R’s N1
192.168.1.253
R’s N2
192.168.10.2
192.168.10.33
To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
Log into the Device’s Web Configurator in advanced mode.
Click Advanced > Static Route.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
41
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Click Edit on a new rule in the Static Route screen.
Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:
4a
Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2.
4b
Type 192.168.1.253 (R’s N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field.
4a
Click Apply.
Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure B’s firewall
settings to allow specific traffic to pass through.
4.5 Multiple Public and Private IP Address Mappings
If your ISP gives you more than one static IP address for your Internet access, you can map each IP
address for a specific service. This tutorial assumes you are given two static public IP addresses.
You want to map them to two servers A and B.
IP-1
IP-2
42
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
This tutorial uses the following example settings:
Table 6 IP Settings in this Tutorial
DEVICE / COMPUTER
IP ADDRESS
The Device’s WAN
172.16.1.253 (IP-1)
172.16.1.254 (IP-2)
The Device’s LAN
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.2
192.168.1.3
a.b.c.d
To do this, you can use either of the following settings:
• Full Feature NAT with many-to-many no overload mapping
• Full Feature NAT with one-to-one mapping
4.5.1 Full Feature NAT + Many-to-Many No Overload Mapping
Use this setting if your applications can use random public IP addresses and the applications are
initiated from the Intranet computers (A and B). For example, VoIP application. See Section 4.5.2
on page 44 if it is not.
IP-1
To configure this:
Click Network > NAT.
Select Active Network Address Translation(NAT) and Full Feature in the General screen.
Click Apply.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
43
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Click the Address Mapping tab, and then click the Edit icon on a new rule.
Configure the rule using the following settings:
• Type: Many-to-Many No Overload
• Local IP addresses: 192.168.1.2 ~ 192.168.1.3
• Global IP addresses: 172.16.1.253 ~ 172.16.1.254
Then click Apply.
4.5.2 Full Feature NAT + One-to-One Mapping
Use this setting if your applications must use fixed public IP addresses and the applications can be
initiated either from the Intranet computers (A and B) or the Internet computer (C). For example,
gaming application.
IP-1
To configure this setting:
44
Click Network > NAT.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Select Active Network Address Translation(NAT) and Full Feature in the General screen.
Click Apply.
Click the Address Mapping tab, click the Edit icon on a new rule.
Configure two rules for the one-to-one mappings:
• Rule 1 (This maps the public IP address 172.16.1.253 to the private IP address 192.168.1.2)
Type: One-to-One
Local Start IP: 192.168.1.2
Global Start IP: 172.16.1.253
• Rule 2 (This maps the public IP address 172.16.1.254 to the private IP address 192.168.1.3)
Type: One-to-One
Local Start IP: 192.168.1.3
Global Start IP: 172.16.1.254
Click Apply on each of the screens.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
45
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4.6 Firewall Rule to Allow a Specified Service
The following Internet firewall rule example allows a Secure Shell (SSH) connection from the
Internet.
Click Security > Firewall > Rules.
Select WAN to LAN in the Packet Direction field.
Figure 9 Firewall Example: Rules
46
In the Rules screen, select the index number after which you want to add the rule. For example, if
you select “6”, your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 (if there is one) becomes
rule 8.
Click Add to display the firewall rule configuration screen.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Select Active and in the Action for Matched Packets field, select Permit. Configure the Source
and Destination Addresses as follows and click Add >> for each. In the Available Services
menu, select SSH(TCP/UDP:22) and click Add >>. Click Apply.
Figure 10 Firewall Example: Edit Rule
On completing the configuration procedure for this Internet firewall rule, the Rules screen should
look like the following.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
47
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Rule 1 allows a SSH connection from the WAN IP address 1.1.1.1 to IP address 1.1.1.2.
Figure 11 Firewall Example: Rules
4.7 Port Binding Configuration
This tutorial shows you how to configure port binding for WAN connections with different ATM QoS
settings for different types of traffic. The port binding feature is used to group each WAN connection
with specific LAN ports and WLANs. In this example ATM QoS settings are configured for WAN PVCs
for time sensitive VoIP traffic and non-time sensitive data traffic.
4.7.1 Configuring ATM QoS for Multiple WAN Connections
This example shows an application for multiple WAN connections with different ATM QoS Settings.
More than one WAN connection on the Device may be configured to record traffic statistics or
calculate service charges.
Three WAN connections are configured over the ADSL line:
• The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/33, is dedicated for general data transmission.
• The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/34, is dedicated for VoIP service.
48
To configure bandwidth for the WAN connections, access the WAN configuration Advanced Setup
screen by clicking Network > WAN. Click Advanced Setup.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
To configure bandwidth for the data connection, select UBR in the ATM QoS Type field. Click
Apply to save the settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
49
Chapter 4 Tutorials
To configure dedicated bandwidth of 400kbps for the VoIP connection, select CBR in the ATM QoS
Type field and enter the Peak Cell Rate as 943 (divide the bandwidth 400000 bps by 424). Click
Apply to save the settings.
Configured WAN connections can be viewed by clicking the More Connections tab under Network
> WAN. See the WAN Setup chapter (Chapter 6 on page 89) for more information on configuring
WAN connections and ATM QoS settings.
50
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4.7.2 Configuring Port Binding
You can then group specific WAN PVCs with LAN ports or WLANs, so traffic from these ports is
forwarded through specific WAN PVCs. In the configuration shown below, the WAN connections set
up in the previous section are bound as follows:
Table 7 Port Binding Groups
GROUP INDEX
WAN CONNECTION
LAN PORT
PVC0 - for Data
eth1, eth2, AP0, AP1, AP2
PVC1 - for VoIP
eth3
Access the port binding screen by clicking Advanced > Port Binding, and select Activated to
turn on the port binding feature. Specify the Group Index and select the ports to include in the
port binding group. Click Apply to save the settings. The configured groups can be viewed by
clicking the Port Binding Summary button. See the Port Binding chapter (Chapter 14 on page
195) for more details on configuring port binding.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
51
Chapter 4 Tutorials
52
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
P ART II
Technical Reference
53
54
C HAPT ER
Internet Setup Wizard
5.1 Overview
Use the wizard setup screens to configure your system for Internet access with the information
given to you by your ISP.
Note: See the advanced menu chapters for background information on these fields.
5.2 Internet Access Wizard Setup
After you enter the password to access the web configurator, select Go to Wizard setup and click
Apply. Otherwise, click the wizard icon (
) in the top right corner of the web configurator to go
to the wizards.
Figure 12 Select a Mode
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
55
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
Click INTERNET SETUP to configure the system for Internet access and wireless connection.
Figure 13 Wizard Welcome
Your Device attempts to detect your DSL connection and your connection type.
3a
The following screen appears if a connection is not detected. Check your hardware connections
and click Restart the INTERNET/WIRELESS SETUP Wizard to return to the wizard welcome
screen. If you still cannot connect, click Manually configure your Internet connection.
Follow the directions in the wizard and enter your Internet setup information as provided to you
by your ISP. See Section 5.2.1 on page 58 for more details.
If you would like to skip your Internet setup and configure the wireless LAN settings, leave Yes
selected and click Next.
Figure 14 Auto Detection: No DSL Connection
56
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
3b
The following screen displays if a PPPoE or PPPoA connection is detected. Enter your Internet
account information (username, password and/or service name) exactly as provided by your
ISP. Then click Next and see Section 5.3 on page 63 for wireless connection wizard setup.
Figure 15 Auto-Detection: PPPoE
3c
The following screen appears if the Device detects a connection but not the connection type.
Click Next and refer to Section 5.2.1 on page 58 on how to manually configure the Device for
Internet access.
Figure 16 Auto Detection: Failed
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
57
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
5.2.1 Manual Configuration
If the Device fails to detect your DSL connection type but the physical line is connected, enter your
Internet access information in the wizard screen exactly as your service provider gave it to you.
Leave the defaults in any fields for which you were not given information.
Figure 17 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 8 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Mode
Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP
address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select
Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the
connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly.
If you select Bridge, you cannot use Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on the Device.
Encapsulation
Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop-down
list box. Choices vary depending on what you select in the Mode field.
If you select Bridge in the Mode field, select either PPPoA or RFC 1483.
If you select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP
or PPPoE.
58
Multiplexing
Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop-down list
box either VC-based or LLC-based.
Virtual Circuit
ID
VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual
circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information.
VPI
Enter the VPI assigned to you. This field may already be configured.
VCI
Enter the VCI assigned to you. This field may already be configured.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
Table 8 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Next
Click this to continue to the next wizard screen. The next wizard screen you see
depends on what protocol you chose above.
Exit
Click this to close the wizard screen without saving.
The next wizard screen varies depending on what mode and encapsulation type you use. All screens
shown are with routing mode. Configure the fields and click Next to continue. See Section 5.3 on
page 63 for wireless connection wizard setup
Figure 18 Internet Connection with PPPoE
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
59
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 9
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
User Name
Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form
user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components
exactly as given.
Password
Enter the password associated with the user name above.
Service Name
Type the name of your PPPoE service here.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Exit
Click this to close the wizard screen without saving.
Figure 19
60
Internet Connection with PPPoE
Internet Connection with RFC 1483
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 10 Internet Connection with RFC 1483
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Address
This field is available if you select Routing in the Mode field.
Type your ISP assigned IP address in this field.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Next
Click this to continue to the next wizard screen.
Exit
Click this to close the wizard screen without saving.
Figure 20 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
61
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 11 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Obtain an IP
Address
Automatically
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not
fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet.
Static IP
Address
Select Static IP Address if your ISP gave you an IP address to use.
IP Address
Enter your ISP assigned IP address.
Subnet Mask
Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.
Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address.
Refer to the appendix to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing
subnetting.
Gateway IP
address
You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you use ENET
ENCAP in the Encapsulation field in the previous screen.
First DNS
Server
Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The DNS servers are passed to the
DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask.
Second DNS
Server
As above.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Exit
Click this to close the wizard screen without saving.
Figure 21 Internet Connection with PPPoA
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 12 Internet Connection with PPPoA
62
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
User Name
Enter the login name that your ISP gives you.
Password
Enter the password associated with the user name above.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
Table 12 Internet Connection with PPPoA (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Exit
Click this to close the wizard screen without saving.
• If the user name and/or password you entered for PPPoE or PPPoA connection are not correct,
the screen displays as shown next. Click Back to Username and Password setup to go back
to the screen where you can modify them.
Figure 22 Connection Test Failed-1
• If the following screen displays, check if your account is activated or click Restart the Internet/
Wireless Setup Wizard to verify your Internet access settings.
Figure 23 Connection Test Failed-2.
5.3 Wireless Connection Wizard Setup
After you configure the Internet access information, use the following screens to set up your
wireless LAN.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
63
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
Select Yes and click Next to configure wireless settings. Otherwise, select No and skip to Step 6.
Figure 24 Connection Test Successful
Use this screen to activate the wireless LAN. Click Next to continue.
Figure 25 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 1
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 1
64
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select the check box to turn on the wireless LAN.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Next
Click this to continue to the next wizard screen.
Exit
Click this to close the wizard screen without saving.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
Configure your wireless settings in this screen. Click Next.
Figure 26 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 14 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 2
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Network
Name(SSID)
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless
LAN.
If you change this field on the Device, make sure all wireless stations use the same
SSID in order to access the network.
Channel
Selection
The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g wireless devices is called a
channel. Select a channel ID that is not already in use by a neighboring device.
Security
Select Manually assign a WPA-PSK key to configure a Pre-Shared Key (WPAPSK). Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA. See Section 5.3.1
on page 66 for more information.
Select Manually assign a WEP key to configure a WEP Key. See Section 5.3.2 on
page 66 for more information.
Select Disable wireless security to have no wireless LAN security configured and
your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Next
Click this to continue to the next wizard screen.
Exit
Click this to close the wizard screen without saving.
Note: The wireless stations and Device must use the same SSID, channel ID and WEP
encryption key (if WEP is enabled), WPA-PSK (if WPA-PSK is enabled) for wireless
communication.
This screen varies depending on the security mode you selected in the previous screen. Fill in the
field (if available) and click Next.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
65
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
5.3.1 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key
Choose Manually assign a WPA-PSK key in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a PreShared Key.
Figure 27 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 15 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Pre-Shared
Key
Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters. You can set up the most secure
wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens. You need to
configure an authentication server to do this.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Next
Click this to continue to the next wizard screen.
Exit
Click this to close the wizard screen without saving.
5.3.2 Manually Assign a WEP Key
Choose Manually assign a WEP key to setup WEP Encryption parameters.
Figure 28 Manually Assign a WEP key
66
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 Manually Assign a WEP key
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Key
The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless stations
must use the same WEP key for data transmission.
Enter any 5 or 13 ASCII characters, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "AF") for a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP key respectively.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Next
Click this to continue to the next wizard screen.
Exit
Click this to close the wizard screen without saving.
Click Apply to save your wireless LAN settings.
Figure 29 Wireless LAN Setup 3
Use the read-only summary table to check whether what you have configured is correct. Click
Finish to complete and save the wizard setup.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
67
Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard
Note: No wireless LAN settings display if you chose not to configure wireless LAN
settings.
Figure 30 Internet Access and WLAN Wizard Setup Complete
68
Launch your web browser and navigate to www.zyxel.com. Internet access is just the beginning.
Refer to the rest of this guide for more detailed information on the complete range of Device
features. If you cannot access the Internet, open the web configurator again to confirm that the
Internet settings you configured in the wizard setup are correct.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
WAN Setup
6.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings from the WAN screens. Use these screens to
configure your Device for Internet access.
A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the
Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other
networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations.
Figure 31 LAN and WAN
LAN
WAN
6.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens
• Use he
t Internet Access Setup screen (Section 6.2 on page 71) to configure the WAN settings
on the Device for Internet access.
• Use he
t More Connections screen (Section 6.3 on page 75) to set up additional Internet access
connections.
6.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN
Encapsulation Method
Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set
up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your
ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP
over Ethernet) or PPPoA, they should also provide a username and password (and service name)
for user authentication.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
69
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
WAN IP Address
The WAN IP address is an IP address for the Device, which makes it accessible from an outside
network. It is used by the Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be
static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the Device tries to access the Internet.
If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and
DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP
encapsulation method).
Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient)
or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of
hosts on the network - not everybody and not just one.
IGMP
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. There are three versions of IGMP. IGMP
version 2 and 3 are improvements over version 1, but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use.
Finding Out More
See Section 6.4 on page 80 for technical background information on WAN.
6.1.3 Before You Begin
You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this
information from your ISP.
70
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
6.2 The Internet Access Setup Screen
Use this screen to change your Device’s WAN settings. Click Network > WAN > Internet Access
Setup. The screen differs by the WAN type and encapsulation you select.
Figure 32 Network > WAN >Internet Access Setup (PPPoE)
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
71
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 17 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Line
ADSL Mode
Select the mode supported by your ISP.
Use Auto Sync-Up if you are not sure which mode to choose from. The Device
dynamically diagnoses the mode supported by the ISP and selects the best
compatible one for your connection.
Other options are ADSL2+, ADSL2, G.DMT, T1.413 and G.lite.
ADSL Type
Select the type supported by your ISP.
Available options are ANNEX A, ANNEX I, ANNEX A/L, ANNEX M and ANNEX A/
I/J/L/M.
General
Mode
Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP gives you one IP
address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select
Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the
connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If
you select Bridge, you cannot use Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on the Device.
Encapsulation
Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box.
Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field.
If you select Bridge in the Mode field, the encapsulation type is RFC 1483.
If you select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP or
PPPoE.
User Name
(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the user name exactly as your ISP
assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a
service name, then enter both components exactly as given.
Password
(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the password associated with the user
name above.
Service Name
(PPPoE only) Type the name of your PPPoE service here.
Multiplexing
Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices
are VC or LLC.
Virtual Circuit ID
VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual
circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information.
VPI
The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI
The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management
of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
PPPoE Passthrough
If the encapsulation in PPPoE, you can enable or disable PPPoE passthrough.
IP Version
Select the IP version specified by your ISP.
IPv4 address
IP Address
This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field.
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not
fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet.
Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address;
otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP
Address field below.
Subnet Mask
Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.
Gateway
Specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP).
IPv6 address
72
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
Table 17 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Message Fetch
Type
If the encapsulation type is ENET ENCAP, you can select Dynamic Mode to
automatically obtain an IP address or Static Mode to enter a static IP address.
DHCP IPv6 Enable
Select DHCP if you want to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address
automatically generated by the Device using the IPv6 prefix from an RA.
Select SLAAC (Stateless address autoconfiguration) to have the Device use the prefix
to automatically generate a unique IP address that does not need to be maintained by
a DHCP server.
DHCP PD Enable
Select Enable to use DHCP PD (Prefix Delegation) to allow the Device to pass the
IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts can then use the prefix to generate
their IPv6 addresses.
IPv6 Address
Enter the IPv6 address assigned by your ISP.
IPv6 Default Gateway
Enter the gateway IPv6 address provided by your ISP.
IPv6 DNS Server1
Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
IPv6 DNS Server2
Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
MLD Proxy
Select Enable to have the Device act as an MLD proxy on this connection. This allows
the Device to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each
multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Connection (PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only)
Keep Alive
Select Keep Alive when you want your connection up all the time. The Device will try
to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected.
Connect Manually
Select Connect Manually when you don't want the connection up all the time, and
would prefer to connect manually. You can activate the connection by clicking the
Connect button on the Status screen.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
Advanced Setup
Click this to display the Advanced WAN Setup screen and edit more details of your
WAN setup.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
73
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
6.2.1 Advanced Internet Access Setup
Use this screen to edit your Device's advanced WAN settings. Click the Advanced Setup button in
the Internet Access Setup screen. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 33 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup: Advanced Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup: Advanced Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
RIP & Multicast Setup
RIP Direction
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information
with other routers. Use this field to control how much routing information the Device
sends and receives on the subnet.
Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only.
RIP Version
This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field.
Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP-2B/RIP-2M. Select RIP-1 to use RIP version
1. Select RIP-2B/RIP-2M to use RIP version 2 broadcast and multicast.
Multicast
Multicast packets are sent to a group of computers on the LAN and are an alternative
to unicast packets (packets sent to one computer) and broadcast packets (packets
sent to every computer).
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a multicast group. The Device supports IGMP-v1 and IGMP-v2.
Select None to disable it.
ATM QoS
74
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
Table 18 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup: Advanced Setup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ATM QoS Type
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or
data traffic. Select UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time
sensitive, such as e-mail. Select rtVBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for
applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay
variation. Select nrtVBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for connections that
do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Peak Cell Rate
Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell
Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the
PCR here.
Sustain Cell Rate
The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be
transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default
is 0 cells/sec.
Maximum Burst
Size
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at
the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.
MTU
MTU
The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet allowed
on an interface or connection. Enter the MTU in this field.
For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500.
For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492.
For PPPoA and RFC 1483, the MTU is 100-1500.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
6.3 The More Connections Screen
The Device allows you to configure more than one Internet access connection. To configure
additional Internet access connections click Network > WAN > More Connections. The screen
differs by the encapsulation you select. When you use the WAN > Internet Access Setup screen
to set up Internet access, you are configuring the first WAN connection.
Figure 34 Network > WAN > More Connections
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
75
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Network > WAN > More Connections
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is an index number indicating the number of the corresponding connection.
Active
This field indicates whether the connection is active or not.
Clear the check box to disable the connection. Select the check box to enable it.
Name
This is the name you gave to the Internet connection.
VPI/VCI
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI)
numbers configured for this WAN connection.
Encapsulation
This field indicates the encapsulation method of the Internet connection.
Modify
The first (ISP) connection is read-only in this screen. Use the WAN > Internet Access
Setup screen to edit it.
Click the Edit icon to edit the Internet connection settings. Click this icon on an empty
configuration to add a new Internet access setup.
Click the Remove icon to delete the Internet access setup from your connection list.
76
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
6.3.1 More Connections Edit
Use this screen to configure a connection. Click the edit icon in the More Connections screen to
display the following screen.
Figure 35 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 20 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
Active
Select the check box to activate or clear the check box to deactivate this
connection.
Name
Enter a unique, descriptive name of up to 13 ASCII characters for this
connection.
Mode
Select Route from the drop-down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers
to share an Internet account.
If you select Bridge, the Device will forward any packet that it does not route to
this remote node; otherwise, the packets are discarded.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
77
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
Table 20 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Encapsulation
Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list
box. Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field.
If you select Bridge in the Mode field, the encapsulation type is RFC 1483.
If you select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET
ENCAP or PPPoE.
Multiplexing
Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list.
Choices are VC or LLC.
By prior agreement, a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit, for example,
VC1 will carry IP. If you select VC, specify separate VPI and VCI numbers for
each protocol.
For LLC-based multiplexing or PPP encapsulation, one VC carries multiple
protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet
header. In this case, only one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for
all protocols.
VPI
The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI
The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local
management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
IP Address
This option is available if you select Route in the Mode field.
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is
not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the
Internet.
If you use the encapsulation type except RFC 1483, select Obtain an IP
Address Automatically when you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise select
Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address
field below.
If you use RFC 1483, enter the IP address given by your ISP in the IP Address
field.
Subnet Mask
This option is available if you select ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field.
Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.
Default Gateway
This option is available if you select ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field.
Specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP).
Connection
Nailed-Up Connection
Select Nailed-Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time.
The Device will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected.
Connect on Demand
Select Connect on Demand when you don't want the connection up all the time
and specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field.
Max Idle Timeout
Specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you select
Connect on Demand. The default setting is 0, which means the Internet
session will not timeout.
NAT
SUA only is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field.
Select SUA Only if you have one public IP address and want to use NAT. Click
Edit Detail to go to the Port Forwarding screen to edit a server mapping set.
Otherwise, select None to disable NAT.
Back
78
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
Table 20 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Advanced Setup
Click this to display the More Connections Advanced Setup screen and edit
more details of your WAN setup.
6.3.2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup
Use this screen to edit your Device's advanced WAN settings. Click the Advanced Setup button in
the More Connections Edit screen. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 36 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 21 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
RIP & Multicast Setup
RIP Direction
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing
information with other routers. Use this field to control how much routing
information the Device sends and receives on the subnet.
Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only.
RIP Version
This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field.
ATM QoS Type
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for
voice or data traffic. Select UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are
non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select nrtVBR (Variable Bit Rate-non Real
Time) or rtVBR (Variable Bit Rate-Real Time) for bursty traffic and bandwidth
sharing with other applications.
Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP-2B and RIP-2M.
ATM QoS
Peak Cell Rate
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak
Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells.
Type the PCR here.
79
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
Table 21 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Sustain Cell Rate
The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be
transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system
default is 0 cells/sec.
Maximum Burst Size
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be
sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.
MTU
MTU
The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet
allowed on an interface or connection. Enter the MTU in this field.
For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500.
For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492.
For PPPoA and RFC, the MTU is 100-1500.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
6.4 WAN Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
6.4.1 Encapsulation
Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The Device supports the following
methods.
6.4.1.1 ENET ENCAP
The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol (ENET ENCAP) is only implemented with the IP
network protocol. IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and
then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it
encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells. ENET ENCAP requires that you specify
a gateway IP address in the Gateway IP Address field in the wizard or WAN screen. You can get
this information from your ISP.
6.4.1.2 PPP over Ethernet
The Device supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard
(RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL,
cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing
access control systems (for example RADIUS).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a
function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and
offer new IP services for individuals.
80
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no
specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on
the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the Device does that part of the task.
Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.
6.4.1.3 PPPoA
PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection
functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The Device encapsulates the PPP session based on
RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service
Provider’s (ISP) DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Access Multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364
for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP.
6.4.1.4 RFC 1483
RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
(AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit
(LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a
separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed
information.
6.4.2 Multiplexing
There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to
use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.
VC-based Multiplexing
In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for
example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where
dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical.
LLC-based Multiplexing
In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained
in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be
advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if
charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.
6.4.3 VPI and VCI
Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers
assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is
reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Please see the appendix for more information.
6.4.4 IP Address Assignment
A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a
different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
81
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices
for IP address and ENET ENCAP gateway.
IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation
If you have a dynamic IP, then the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable
(N/A). If you have a static IP, then you need to fill in the IP Address field, the Subnet mask and
the Gateway IP Address field.
IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation
In this case the IP address assignment must be static.
IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation
In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP. For a static IP you must fill in all the IP
Address and Gateway IP Address fields as supplied by your ISP. However for a dynamic IP, the
Device acts as a DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and Gateway IP Address
fields are not applicable (N/A) as the DHCP server assigns them to the Device.
6.4.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP)
A nailed-up connection is a dial-up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic
demand. The Device does two things when you specify a nailed-up connection. The first is that idle
timeout is disabled. The second is that the Device will try to bring up the connection when turned
on and whenever the connection is down. A nailed-up connection can be very expensive for obvious
reasons.
Do not specify a nailed-up connection unless your telephone company offers flat-rate service or you
need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern.
6.4.6 NAT
NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in
a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a
different IP address known within another network.
6.5 Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate
and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate
congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video
connections.
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may
be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a
maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed
because it is dependent on the line speed.
82
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the
maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be
greater than the PCR.
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS
is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more
cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again.
If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that
correlates to your upstream line rate.
The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS.
Figure 37 Example of Traffic Shaping
6.5.1 ATM Traffic Classes
These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0
Specification.
Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being
sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections
that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds
this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution
video and voice.
Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use
the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time
(VBR-nRT) connections.
The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely
controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is
specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would
be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth
requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
83
Chapter 6 WAN Setup
The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical
on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an
VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers.
Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)
The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't
guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An
example application is background file transfer.
84
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
LAN Setup
7.1 Overview
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices
are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building.
Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses.
LAN
DSL
7.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens
• Use he
t LAN IP screen (Section 7.2 on page 86) to set the LAN IP address and subnet mask of
your Device. You can also edit your Device's RIP, multicast and Windows Networking settings
from this screen.
• Use he
t DHCP Server screen (Section 7.3 on page 88) to configure the Device’s DHCP settings.
• Use he
t Client List screen (Section 7.4 on page 89) to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific
individual computers based on their MAC Addresses.
• Use he
t IP Alias screen (Section 7.5 on page 90) to change your Device’s IP alias settings.
• Use he
t IPv6 screen (Section 7.6 on page 92) to configure the IPv6 settings on your Device’s
LAN interface.
7.1.2 What You Need To Know About LAN
IP Address
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
85
Chapter 7 LAN Setup
Subnet Mask
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use
subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
DHCP
A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your Device an IP address, subnet
mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on.
RIP
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other
routers.
Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient)
or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of
hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1.
IGMP
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. There are three versions of IGMP. IGMP
version 2 and 3 are improvements over version 1, but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use.
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a networking device before you can access it.
Finding Out More
See Section 7.7 on page 93 for technical background information on LANs.
7.1.3 Before You Begin
Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client
List screen.
7.2 The LAN IP Screen
Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your Device. Click
Network > LAN to open the IP screen.
Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings.
86
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 7 LAN Setup
Enter an IP address into the IP Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation.
This will become the IP address of your Device.
Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to
leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP
address you entered.
Click Apply to save your settings.
Figure 38 Network > LAN > IP
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 22 Network > LAN > IP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Address
Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your Device in dotted decimal
notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default).
IP Subnet Mask
Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example
255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your Device automatically computes the subnet mask
based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are
instructed to do so.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
Advanced Setup
Click this to display the Advanced LAN Setup screen and edit more details of your
LAN setup.
7.2.1 The Advanced LAN IP Setup Screen
Use this screen to edit your Device's RIP, multicast and Windows Networking settings. Click the
Advanced Setup button in the LAN IP screen. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 39 Network > LAN > IP: Advanced Setup
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
87
Chapter 7 LAN Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 23 Network > LAN > IP: Advanced Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
RIP & Multicast Setup
RIP Direction
Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only.
RIP Version
Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP-2B and RIP-2M.
IGMP Snoop
Select Enabled to activate IGMP Snooping. This allows the Device to passively learn
memberships in multicast groups.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
7.3 The DHCP Server Screen
Use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the Device sends to the DHCP client
devices on the LAN. Click Network > DHCP Server to open this screen.
Figure 40 Network > LAN > DHCP Server
88
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 7 LAN Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 24 Network > LAN > DHCP Server
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DHCP Server
DHCP
If set to Server, your Device can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS
servers to Windows 95, Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client.
If set to None, the DHCP server will be disabled.
If set to Relay, the Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP
requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. Enter the IP
address of the actual, remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this
case.
When DHCP is used, the following items need to be set:
IP Pool Starting
Address
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
Pool Size
This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool.
Remote DHCP Server
If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then enter the IP address of the actual
remote DHCP server here.
DNS Server
DNS Servers Assigned
by DHCP Server
The Device passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address to the DHCP
clients.
DNS Relay
Select Automatically to have the Device act as a DNS proxy if your ISP uses IPCP
DNS server extensions. The Device tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the Device
itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the
Device, the Device forwards the query to the real DNS server learned through IPCP
and relays the response back to the computer. Select Manually to specify the DNS
server IP address manually.
Primary /Secondary
DNS Server
Enter the IP address of your primary/secondary DNS server.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
7.4 The Client List Screen
This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on
their MAC Addresses.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is
assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,
00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
89
Chapter 7 LAN Setup
Use this screen to change your Device’s static DHCP settings. Click Network > LAN > Client List
to open the following screen.
Figure 41 Network > LAN > Client List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Network > LAN > Client List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Address
Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC
address that you will also specify.
MAC Address
Enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN.
Add
Click this to add a static DHCP entry.
This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row).
Status
This field displays whether the client is connected to the Device.
Host Name
This field displays the computer host name.
IP Address
This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
MAC Address
The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is
unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).
A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is
assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other
adapter has a similar address.
Reserve
Select the check box in the heading row to automatically select all check boxes or
select the check box(es) in each entry to have the Device always assign the selected
entry(ies)’s IP address(es) to the corresponding MAC address(es) (and host name(s)).
You can select up to 10 entries in this table.
Modify
Click the modify icon to have the IP address field editable and change it.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
7.5 The IP Alias Screen
IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same
Ethernet interface. The Device supports logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet
interface with the Device itself as the gateway for each LAN network.
90
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 7 LAN Setup
When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access between the LAN's
logical networks (subnets).
Note: Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do overlap.
The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A, B, and C.
Figure 42 Physical Network & Partitioned Logical Networks
A: 192.168.1.1 - 192.168.1.24
Ethernet
Interface
B: 192.168.2.1 - 192.168.2.24
C: 192.168.3.1 - 192.168.3.24
7.5.1 Configuring the LAN IP Alias Screen
Use this screen to change your Device’s IP alias settings. Click Network > LAN > IP Alias to open
the following screen.
Figure 43 Network > LAN > IP Alias
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 26 Network > LAN > IP Alias
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Alias
Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the Device.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of your Device in dotted decimal notation.
Alternatively, click the right mouse button to copy and/or paste the IP address.
IP Subnet Mask
Your Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that
you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by
the Device.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
91
Chapter 7 LAN Setup
7.6 The IPv6 Screen
Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings for your Device’s LAN interface. See Appendix E on
page 281 for background information about IPv6.
Figure 44 Network > LAN > IPv6
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 Network > LAN > IPv6
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Radvd Setup
Radvd Enable
Select Enable to have the Device send router advertisement messages to the LAN
hosts.
Router advertisement is a response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast
advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters, such as
IPv6 prefix and DNS information.
Router solicitation is a request from a host to locate a router that can act as the
default router and forward packets.
Note: The LAN hosts neither generate global IPv6 addresses nor communicate with
other networks if you disable this feature.
Radvd Mode
If Auto is selected, the Device will pass IPv6 prefix and DNS information in router
advertisements.
If Mannual is selected, you can specify the IPv6 network prefix information for router
advertisement.
Prefix / Length
92
If manual router advertisement mode is selected, specify the IPv6 prefix and prefix
length to pass to hosts.
Preferred Lifetime
Enter the preferred lifetime for the prefix.
Valid Lifetime
Enter the valid lifetime for the prefix.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 7 LAN Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DHCP6 Setup
DHCP6 Server
Select Enable to have the Device act as a DHCP6 server and pass IPv6 Prefix and DNS
information to clients.
DHCP6 Mode
Select Auto if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 Prefix and DNS information. Select
Mannual to configure these parameters manually.
Prefix/Length
If manual DHCP6 mode is selected, specify the IPv6 prefix and prefix length to pass to
clients.
Preferred Lifetime
Enter the preferred lifetime for the prefix.
Valid Lifetime
Enter the valid lifetime for the prefix.
Primary DNS
Enter the first DNS server IP address the Device passes to the DHCP clients.
Secondary DNS
Enter the second DNS server IP address the Device passes to the DHCP clients.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
7.7 LAN Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
7.7.1 LANs, WANs and the Device
The actual physical connection determines whether the Device ports are LAN or WAN ports. There
are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network
as shown next.
Figure 45 LAN and WAN IP Addresses
LAN
WAN
7.7.2 DHCP Setup
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to
obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Device as a DHCP
server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for
the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else
the computer must be manually configured.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
93
Chapter 7 LAN Setup
IP Pool Setup
The Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the
product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to
your LAN computers.
7.7.3 DNS Server Addresses
DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa.
The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a
computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are
passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.
There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses.
• The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when
you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in
the DHCP Setup screen.
• Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of
IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS
servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The Device
supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature.
Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It
does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If
your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the
DHCP Setup screen.
7.7.4 LAN TCP/IP
The Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to
systems that support DHCP client capability.
IP Address and Subnet Mask
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN
share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your
network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in
selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user
account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this
is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the Device.
The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for
private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select
192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the
network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.
94
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 7 LAN Setup
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for
instance, 192.168.1.1, for your Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is
using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Device will compute
the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change
the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the
Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to
the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has
reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0
— 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0
— 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP
can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are
part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the
appropriate IP addresses.
Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment,
please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private Internets” and RFC 1466,
“Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”.
7.7.5 RIP Setup
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other
routers. The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets. When set to:
• Both - the Device will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information
that it receives.
• In Only - the Device will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received.
• Out Only - the Device will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received.
• None - the Device will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received.
The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the
Device sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported; but RIP2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an
unusual network topology.
Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B
uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
95
Chapter 7 LAN Setup
7.7.6 Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient)
or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of
hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an
improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. IGMP version 3
supports source filtering, reporting or ignoring traffic from specific source address to a particular
host on the network. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability
between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP
address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The
address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address
224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts
(including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The
address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group.
The Device supports IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP-v2). At start up, the
Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the Device
periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the Device LAN
and/or WAN interfaces in the web configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP
multicasting on these interfaces.
96
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Wireless LAN
8.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to perform tasks related to setting up and optimizing your wireless
network, including the following.
• Turning the wireless connection on or off.
• Configuring a name, wireless channel and security for the network.
• Using WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) to configure your wireless network.
• Setting up multiple wireless networks.
• Using a MAC (Media Access Control) address filter to restrict access to the wireless network.
• Setting up a Wireless Distribution System (WDS).
• Performing other performance-related wireless tasks.
8.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens
This section describes the Device’s Network > Wireless LAN screens. Use these screens to set up
your Device’s wireless connection.
• Use he
t AP screen (see Section 8.2 on page 99) to turn the wireless connection on or off, set up
wireless security, configure the MAC filter, and make other basic configuration changes.
• Use he
t More AP screen (see Section 8.3 on page 106) to set up multiple wireless networks on
your Device.
• Use he
t WPS screen (see Section 8.4 on page 108) to enable or disable WPS, generate a security
PIN (Personal Identification Number) and see information about the Device’s WPS status.
• Use he
t WPS Station (see Section 8.5 on page 109) screen to set up WPS by pressing a button
or using a PIN.
• Use he
t WDS screen (see Section 8.6 on page 110) to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in
which the Device acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points.
• Use he
t Scheduling screen (see Section 8.7 on page 112) to configure the dates/times to enable
or disable the wireless LAN.
You don’t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection. For example,
you may just want to set up a network name, a wireless radio channel and security in the AP
screen.
Note: Only 2.412GHz~2.462GHz is allowed to be used in USA, which means only channel 1~11 is
available for American users to choose.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
97
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
8.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless
Wireless Basics
“Wireless” is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and
receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one
another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange
information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking
devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to
use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in
that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data
encryption.
SSID
Each network must have a name, referred to as the SSID - “Service Set IDentifier”. The “service
set” is the network, so the “service set identifier” is the network’s name. This helps you identify
your wireless network when wireless networks’ coverage areas overlap and you have a variety of
networks to choose from.
MAC Address Filter
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address consists
of twelve hexadecimal characters (0-9, and A to F), and it is usually written in the following format:
“0A:A0:00:BB:CC:DD”.
The MAC address filter controls access to the wireless network. You can use the MAC address of
each wireless client to allow or deny access to the wireless network.
Finding Out More
See Section 8.8 on page 112 for advanced technical information on wireless networks.
8.1.3 Before You Start
Before you start using these screens, ask yourself the following questions. See Section 8.1.2 on
page 98 if some of the terms used here are not familiar to you.
• What wireless standards do the other wireless devices in your network support (IEEE 802.11g,
for example)? What is the most appropriate standard to use?
• What security options do the other wireless devices in your network support (WPA-PSK, for
example)? What is the strongest security option supported by all the devices in your network?
• Do the other wireless devices in your network support WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)? If so, you
can set up a well-secured network very easily.
Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not, you can use WPS to set up your
network and then add the non-WPS devices manually, although this is somewhat more
complicated to do.
• What advanced options do you want to configure, if any? If you want to configure advanced
options such as Quality of Service, ensure that you know precisely what you want to do. If you do
not want to configure advanced options, leave them as they are.
98
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
8.2 The AP Screen
Use this screen to configure the wireless settings of your Device. Click Network > Wireless LAN
to open the AP screen.
Figure 46 Network > Wireless LAN > AP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 28 Network > Wireless LAN > AP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Setup
Enable Wireless
LAN
Click the check box to activate wireless LAN.
Channel
Selection
Select the country in which you are using the device. Set the operating frequency/channel.
Select Auto to automatically scan for a channel.
Common Setup
Network Name
(SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is
associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same
SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless
LAN.
Note: If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and
you change the Device’s SSID or WEP settings, you will lose your wireless
connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless
settings of your computer to match the Device’s new settings.
Hide SSID
Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot
obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Security Mode
See the following sections for more details about this field.
MAC Filter
This shows whether the wireless devices with the MAC addresses listed are allowed or
denied to access the Device using this SSID.
Edit
Click this to go to the MAC Filter screen to configure MAC filter settings. See Section 8.2.6
on page 106 for more details.
QoS
Select this check box to activate Quality of Service (QoS).
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
99
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
Table 28 Network > Wireless LAN > AP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
Advanced Setup
Click this to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit more details of your
WLAN setup. See Section 8.2.5 on page 104 for more details.
8.2.1 No Security
In the Network > Wireless LAN > AP screen, select No Security from the Security Mode list to
allow wireless devices to communicate with the Device without any data encryption or
authentication.
Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your Device, your network is
accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Figure 47 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: No Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: No Security
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Mode
Choose No Security from the drop-down list box.
8.2.2 WEP Encryption
Use this screen to configure and enable WEP encryption. Click Network > Wireless LAN to display
the AP screen. Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list.
100
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using
widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more
effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the
wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices
support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing
stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available.
Figure 48 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Static WEP
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Static WEP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Mode
Choose Static WEP from the drop-down list box.
Passphrase
Enter a passphrase (up to 32 printable characters) and click Generate. The Device
automatically generates a WEP key.
WEP Key
The WEP key is used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless stations must use
the same WEP key for data transmission.
If you want to manually set the WEP key, enter any 5 or 13 characters (ASCII string) or 10
or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") for a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP key respectively.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
101
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
8.2.3 WPA(2)-PSK
Use this screen to configure and enable WPA(2)-PSK authentication. Click Network > Wireless
LAN to display the AP screen. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list.
Figure 49 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)-PSK
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)-PSK
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Mode
Choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box.
Encryption
If the security mode is WPA-PSK, you can set the encryption mode to TKIP to enable
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) security on your wireless network.
If the security mode is WPA2-PSK, you can set the encryption mode to AES to enable
Advanced Encryption System (AES) security on your wireless network. AES provides
superior security to TKIP.
If the security mode is WPA2-PSK and WPA Compatible is selected, you can set the
encryption mode to TKIP/AES to allow both TKIP and AES types of security in your
wireless network.
WPA Compatible
This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK in the Security Mode
field.
Select the check box to have both WPA-PSK wireless clients be able to communicate
with the Device even when the Device is using WPA2-PSK.
Pre-Shared Key
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The
only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common
password, instead of user-specific credentials.
Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces
and symbols).
WPA Group Key
Update Timer
102
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA(2)-PSK key
management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA(2) key management) sends a new
group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA(2) equivalent of
automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic
basis.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
8.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication
Use this screen to configure and enable WPA or WPA2 authentication. Click the Wireless LAN link
under Network to display the AP screen. Select WPA, WPA2 or WPAMixed from the Security
Mode list.
Figure 50 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Mode
Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box.
Encryption
If the security mode is WPA-PSK, you can set the encryption mode to TKIP to enable
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) security on your wireless network.
If the security mode is WPA2-PSK, you can set the encryption mode to AES to enable
Advanced Encryption System (AES) security on your wireless network. AES provides
superior security to TKIP.
If the security mode is WPA2-PSK and WPA Compatible is selected, you can set the
encryption mode to TKIP/AES to allow both TKIP and AES types of security in your
wireless network.
WPA Compatible
This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK or WPA2 in the Security
Mode field.
Select the check box to have both WPA-PSK and WPA wireless clients be able to
communicate with the Device even when the Device is using WPA2-PSK or WPA2.
ReAuthentication
Timer
Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order
to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds.
Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the
reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority.
Idle Timeout
The Device automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a
period of inactivity. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password
again before access to the wired network is allowed.
WPA Group Key
Update Timer
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA(2)-PSK key
management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA(2) key management) sends a new
group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA(2) equivalent of
automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic
basis.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
103
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Authentication Server
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation.
Port Number
Enter the port number of the external authentication server.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do
so with additional information.
Shared Secret
Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between
the external authentication server and the Device.
The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Device. The
key is not sent over the network.
8.2.5 Wireless LAN Advanced Setup
Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click the Advanced Setup button in the
AP screen. The screen appears as shown.
See Section 8.8.2 on page 114 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen.
Figure 51 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Advanced Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Advanced Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Advanced Setup
104
RTS/CTS
Threshold
Enter a value between 0 and 2347.
Fragmentation
Threshold
This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and
2346.
Output Power
Set the output power of the Device. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease
the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following:
100%, 75%, 50% or 25%.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Advanced Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Preamble
Select a preamble type from the drop-down list menu. Choices are Long or Short. See
the Appendix D on page 271 for more information.
802.11 Mode
Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate
with the Device.
Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate
with the Device.
Select 802.11b+g to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be
reduced.
Select 802.11n to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the
Device.
Select 802.11g+n to allow either IEEE 802.11g or IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be
reduced.
Select 802.11b+g+n to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n compliant
WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might
be reduced.
11n Settings
Channel
Bandwidth
Select whether the Device uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or Auto. If Auto is
selected, the Device will use 40MHz if it is supported.
A 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers faster speeds.
40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase
throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20
MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal.
Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your
neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding.
This field is available only when you set the Wireless Mode to 802.11n or
802.11b+g+n.
Extension
Channel
When a channel bandwidth of 40Mhz is used, select if the secondary channel is bonded
above the 20Mhz channel (above the control channel) or below the 20Mhz channel
(below the control channel).
Guard Interval
Specify the time interval between transmissions. A shorter guard interval can increase
data rate, but may increase transmission errors.
MCS
Select the Modulation Coding Scheme (MCS) index value to set modulation and coding,
with a higher index being capable of higher data rates.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
105
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
8.2.6 MAC Filter
Use this screen to change your Device’s MAC filter settings. Click the Edit button in the AP screen.
The screen appears as shown.
Figure 52 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: MAC Address Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: MAC Address Filter
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable MAC
Filter
Select the check box to enable MAC address filtering.
Filter Action
Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table.
Select Deny to block access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access
the Device
Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access
to the Device.
Set
This is the index number of the MAC address.
MAC Address
Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the
Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that
is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
8.3 The More AP Screen
This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the Device.
106
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
Click Network > Wireless LAN > More AP. The following screen displays.
Figure 53 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 35 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the index number of each SSID profile.
Active
This field indicates whether this SSID is active.
SSID
An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the Device’s BSSs. The SSID
(Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is
associated.
This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client
scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the
wireless client utility.
Security
Modify Click
This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile.
the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile.
8.3.1 More AP Edit
Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen.
The following screen displays.
Figure 54 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP: Edit
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
107
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 36 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP: Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Network Name (SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless
device is associated. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII
characters) for the wireless LAN.
Note: If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless
LAN and you change the Device’s SSID or security settings, you will lose your
wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change
the wireless settings of your computer to match the Device’s new settings.
Hide SSID
Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station
cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Security Mode
See Section 8.2 on page 99 for more details about this field.
MAC Filter
This shows whether the wireless devices with the MAC addresses listed are allowed
or denied to access the Device using this SSID.
Edit
Click this to go to the MAC Filter screen to configure MAC filter settings. See
Section 8.2.6 on page 106 for more details.
QoS
Select this check box to activate Quality of Service (QoS).
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
8.4 The WPS Screen
Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your Device.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS.
108
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
Click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS. The following screen displays.
Figure 55 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WPS Setup
Enable WPS
Select the check box to activate WPS on the Device.
PIN Number
This shows the PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the Device. Enter this PIN in the
configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS.
The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method.
Generate
WPS Status
Click this to have the Device create a new PIN.
This displays Configured when the Device has connected to a wireless network using
WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been
changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen.
This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless or wireless
security changes on the Device or you click Release to remove the configured wireless
and wireless security settings.
Release
This button is available when the WPS status is Configured.
Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS
connections on the Device.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Refresh
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
8.5 The WPS Station Screen
Use this screen to set up a WPS wireless network using either Push Button Configuration (PBC) or
PIN Configuration.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
109
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
Click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station. The following screen displays.
Figure 56 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 38 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Push Button
Click this to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the
Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the
outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Push Button on this screen.
Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within two minutes of
pressing this button.
Or input station's
PIN number
Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Start
to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network.
You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the device’s
settings.
Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its
PIN to the Device.
8.6 The WDS Screen
An AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge
allowing you to wirelessly connect two wired network segments. The WDS screen allows you to
configure the Device to connect to two or more APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled.
Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the Device and
other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security
settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the Device and any
wireless clients.
Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models
support WDS links. Check your other AP’s documentation.
110
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
Click Network > Wireless LAN > WDS. The following screen displays.
Figure 57 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WDS Security
Select the type of the key used to encrypt data between APs. All the wireless APs
(including the Device) must use the same pre-shared key for data transmission.
The option is available only when you set the security mode to WPA(2) or WPA(2)PSK in the Wireless LAN > AP screen.
TKIP
Select this to use TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) encryption.
AES
Select this to use AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption.
This is the index number of the individual WDS link.
Active
Select this to activate the link between the Device and the peer device to which this
entry refers. When you do not select the check box this link is down.
Remote Bridge
MAC Address
Type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal
character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc).
PSK
Enter a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including
spaces and symbols).
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
111
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
8.7 The Scheduling Screen
Use the wireless LAN scheduling to configure the days you want to enable or disable the wireless
LAN. Click Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling. The following screen displays.
Figure 58 Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 40 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable Wireless
LAN Scheduling
Select this box to activate wireless LAN scheduling on your Device.
Action
Select On or Off to enable or disable the wireless LAN.
Day
Check the day(s) you want to turn the wireless LAN on or off.
The following
times
Specify a time frame during which the schedule would apply.
For example, if you set the time range from 12:00 to 23:00, the wireless LAN will be
turned on only during this time period.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
8.8 Wireless LAN Technical Reference
This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix.
112
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
8.8.1 Wireless Network Overview
Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges.
• A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer.
• An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with
numerous wireless clients and let them access the network.
• A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients,
extending a network’s range.
Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways.
• An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless
clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points.
• An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to
one another in order to exchange information.
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 59 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the
access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your
Device is the AP.
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
113
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or
frequency, to send and receive information.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the
information that is sent in the wireless network.
Radio Channels
In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For
the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a
variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you
create a network, you must select a channel to use.
Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of
available channels also varies.
8.8.2 Additional Wireless Terms
The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the Device’s Web
Configurator.
Table 41 Additional Wireless Terms
TERM
DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS Threshold
In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes
not aware of each other’s presence. This may cause them to send information to
the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through.
By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must
sometimes get permission to send information to the Device. The lower the value,
the more often the devices must get permission.
If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then
wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the Device.
Preamble
A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble
modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the Device
does, it cannot communicate with the Device.
Authentication
The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network.
Fragmentation
Threshold
A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger
threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy.
8.8.3 Wireless Security Overview
By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this
means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data
passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to
the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to
compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to
ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried
on it.
114
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people
presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a “key” phrase) can access the
network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only
people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been
authenticated are given the code key.
These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired
Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a
determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a
user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you
use a long key which is difficult for an attacker’s software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter
long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short
key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary.
Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, it’s not just people who have
sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless
network should ensure that effective security is in place.
A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure
information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random
and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and
her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use
“70dodchal71vanpoi” as your security key.
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless
network.
8.8.3.1 SSID
Normally, the Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide
the SSID instead, in which case the Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should
change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless
devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that
is sent in the wireless network.
8.8.3.2 MAC Address Filter
Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC
address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example,
00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless
network, see the device’s User’s Guide or other documentation.
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to
use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the
correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless
network, it does not matter if it has the correct information.
1.
Some wireless devices, such as scanners, cannot detect wireless networks but can use wireless networks. These kinds
of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2.
Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
115
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an
authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.
8.8.3.3 User Authentication
Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every
device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this.
For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS
server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server,
you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.
Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network,
even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized
wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and
password to use the wireless network.
8.8.3.4 Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless
network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot
understand the message.
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section 8.8.3.3
on page 116 for information about this.)
Table 42 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
Weakest
NO AUTHENTICATION
RADIUS SERVER
No Security
WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
Strongest
WPA2-PSK
WPA2
For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users
do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or
WPA2-PSK.
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network
supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the Device and you do not have
a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two
devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should
set up Static WEP in the wireless network.
Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger
encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still
possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information
pretty quickly.
When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your Device, you can also select an option (WPA
compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some
116
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network
login) and select the WPA compatible option in the Device.
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer
the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key.
8.8.4 Signal Problems
Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance,
interference and absorption.
Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference
occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio
transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are
coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when
physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal.
8.8.5 BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a
wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is
disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other.
When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired
network but cannot communicate with each other.
Figure 60 Basic Service set
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
117
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
8.8.6 MBSSID
Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well
as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The Device’s
MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to
provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security
modes to different SSIDs.
Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP.
8.8.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs
• A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously.
• You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs
(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each other’s
communications (but not communicate with each other).
• MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security.
8.8.7 Wireless Distribution System (WDS)
The Device can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS (Wireless Distribution System)
links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the
security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to
your other access point’s documentation for details.
The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a
wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can
establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1
has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2.
Figure 61 WDS Link Example
WDS
AP 1
AP 2
8.8.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS)
Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless
network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure).
Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its
configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device
to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two
118
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set
up a secure network by themselves.
8.8.8.1 Push Button Configuration
WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled
device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information.
every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their
configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button.
Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.
Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another.
Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration
utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the Device, see
Section 8.5 on page 109).
Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the Device you must press the
WPS button for more than three seconds.
Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name
(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee.
If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s
configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
8.8.8.2 PIN Configuration
Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be
static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking
on a button in the configuration interface).
Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure
that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to
activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of
both devices to use the PIN method.
When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client)
into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated
on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends
the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network.
Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router
(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method.
Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices.
Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s Guide for how to
do this.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
119
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the
client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the
Device, see Section 8.4 on page 108).
Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface.
If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another device’s PIN, you can
either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s PIN in the client - it does not matter which.
Start WPS on both devices within two minutes.
Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself.
On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect,
WPS was successful.
If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If
you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
120
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer)
connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.
Figure 62 Example WPS Process: PIN Method
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
WPS
This device’s
WPS PIN: 123456
WPS
Enter WPS PIN
from other device:
WPS
START
WPS
START
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
SECURE EAP TUNNEL
SSID
WPA(2)-PSK
COMMUNICATION
8.8.8.3 How WPS Works
When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts
as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts
as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a
secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the
WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used
depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it
sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
121
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a
WPS-enabled access point.
Figure 63 How WPS works
ACTIVATE
WPS
ACTIVATE
WPS
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
WPS HANDSHAKE
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
SECURE TUNNEL
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two
minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary.
The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS
transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing
networked devices and the new device.
Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the
enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients.
By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an existing network
and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is
unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a
WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A
configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a
configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS
connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset
it to its factory defaults.
8.8.8.4 Example WPS Network Setup
This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.
The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are
unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1
122
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security
information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information.
Figure 64 WPS: Example Network Step 1
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
SECURITY INFO
AP1
CLIENT 1
In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar
mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must
connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the
registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies
the existing security information to Client 2.
Figure 65 WPS: Example Network Step 2
REGISTRAR
EXISTING CONNECTION
AP1
CLIENT 1
ENROLLEE
INF
RI
CU
SE
CLIENT 2
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
123
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you
cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client
2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead.
Figure 66 WPS: Example Network Step 3
EXISTING CONNECTION
CLIENT 1
IS
EX
GC
TI N
I ON
CT
NN
AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 2
SE
CU
RIT
ENROLLEE
INF
AP2
8.8.8.5 Limitations of WPS
WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware.
• WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It
does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).
• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices
simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other.
For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by
pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it
successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way.
• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to
a network you already set up using WPS.
WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared
key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or
WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar
device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you
can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device
must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK).
124
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button
on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled
device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the
“correct” enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a
possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network.
You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices
simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not
have access to the network. If this happens, open the access point’s configuration interface and
look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the
access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a
rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the
MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If
there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
125
Chapter 8 Wireless LAN
126
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Network Address Translation (NAT)
9.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Device. NAT (Network Address Translation NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source
address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within
another network.
9.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens
• Use he
t NAT General Setup screen (Section 9.2 on page 128) to configure the NAT setup
settings.
• Use he
t Port Forwarding screen (Section 9.3 on page 129) to configure forward incoming
service requests to the server(s) on your local network.
• Use he
t Address Mapping screen (Section 9.4 on page 133) to change your Device’s address
mapping settings.
• Use he
t ALG screen (Section 9.5 on page 135) to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the
Device.
9.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT
Inside/Outside
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers
of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside
hosts.
Global/Local
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
NAT
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
127
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Port Forwarding
A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP,
that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network
appear as a single computer to the outside world.
SUA (Single User Account) Versus NAT
SUA (Single User Account) is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types
of mapping, Many-to-One and Server. The Device also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple
global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types
as outlined in Table 50 on page 139.
• Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Device.
• Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Device.
Finding Out More
See Section 9.6 on page 136 for advanced technical information on NAT.
9.2 The NAT General Setup Screen
Use this screen to activate NAT. Click Network > NAT to open the following screen.
Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA/NAT, to allow traffic
from the WAN to be forwarded through the Device.
Figure 67 Network > NAT > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 43 Network > NAT > General
128
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active Network
Address Translation
Select this check box to enable NAT.
SUA Only
Select this radio button if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Device.
Full Feature
Select this radio button if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Device.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 43 Network > NAT > General (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Max NAT/Firewall
Session Per User
When computers use peer to peer applications, such as file sharing applications, they
need to establish NAT sessions. If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a single
client can establish, this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being used. In
this case, no additional NAT sessions can be established, and users may not be able to
access the Internet.
Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session. Use this field to limit the
number of NAT/Firewall sessions client computers can establish through the Device.
If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications, you can
raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of
NAT sessions they can establish. If your network has a large number of users using peer
to peer applications, you can lower this number to ensure no single client is exhausting
all of the available NAT sessions.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
9.3 The Port Forwarding Screen
Note: This screen is available only when you select SUA only in the NAT > General
screen.
Use this screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network.
You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP
address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can
support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to
specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or
a range of ports.
The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix F on page 291. Please refer
to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any
active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
Default Server IP Address
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default
server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the Device discards all packets
received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
129
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example)
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 68 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
A=192.168.1.33
LAN
WAN
B=192.168.1.34
192.168.1.1
C=192.168.1.35
IP Address assigned by ISP
D=192.168.1.36
9.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen
Click Network > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen.
See Appendix F on page 291 for port numbers commonly used for particular services.
Figure 69 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding
130
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 44 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Default Server Setup
Default Server
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default
server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen. If you do not
assign a Default Server IP address, the Device discards all packets received for ports
that are not specified here or in the remote management setup.
Change to Server
In this field, you can change the IP address of the default server.
Port Forwarding
Service Name
Select a service from the drop-down list box.
Server IP Address
Enter the IP address of the server for the specified service.
Add
Click this button to add a rule to the table below.
This is the rule index number (read-only).
Active
This field indicates whether the rule is active or not.
Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
Service Name
This is a service’s name.
Start Port
This is the first port number that identifies a service.
End Port
This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Port Translation
This is the start/end port number that the device translates.
Start/End Port
Server IP Address
This is the server’s IP address.
Modify
Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule.
Click the delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule. Note that subsequent
address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
131
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
9.3.2 The Port Forwarding Rule Edit Screen
Use this screen to edit a port forwarding rule. Click the rule’s edit icon in the Port Forwarding
screen to display the screen shown next.
Figure 70 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding: Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 45 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding: Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Rule Setup
Active
Click this check box to enable the rule.
Service Name
Enter a name to identify this port-forwarding rule.
Start Port
Enter a port number in this field.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in
the End Port field.
End Port
Enter a port number in this field.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the Start Port field above and
then enter it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the
port number in the Start Port field above.
132
Server IP
Address
Enter the inside IP address of the server here.
Port Translation
Start / End Port
Enter the start port number here to which you want the device to translate the incoming
port. For a range of ports, you only need to enter the first number of the range to which
you want the incoming ports translated, the device automatically calculates the last port of
the translated port range.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
9.4 The Address Mapping Screen
Note: The Address Mapping screen is available only when you select Full Feature in
the NAT > General screen.
Ordering your rules is important because the Device applies the rules in the order that you specify.
When a rule matches the current packet, the Device takes the corresponding action and the
remaining rules are ignored. If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule, your
configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty rules. For example, if you have already
configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9. In the set
summary screen, the new rule will be rule 7, not 9. Now if you delete rule 4, rules 5 to 7 will be
pushed up by 1 rule, so old rules 5, 6 and 7 become new rules 4, 5 and 6.
To change your Device’s address mapping settings, click Network > NAT > Address Mapping to
open the following screen.
Figure 71 Network > NAT > Address Mapping
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 46 Network > NAT > Address Mapping
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the rule index number.
Local Start IP
This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). Local IP addresses are N/A for Server
port mapping.
Local End IP
This is the end Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then
this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the
Local End IP address. This field is N/A for One-to-one and Server mapping types.
Global Start IP
This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a
dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for Many-to-One and Server
mapping types.
Global End IP
This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is N/A for One-to-one,
Many-to-One and Server mapping types.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
133
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 46 Network > NAT > Address Mapping (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Type
1-1: One-to-one mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port
numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.
M-1: Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This
is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL's Single User Account
feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only.
M-M Ov (Overload): Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to
shared global IP addresses.
MM No (No Overload): Many-to-Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to
unique global IP addresses.
Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT
to be accessible to the outside world.
Modify
Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule.
Click the delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent
address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action.
9.4.1 The Address Mapping Rule Edit Screen
Use this screen to edit an address mapping rule. Click the rule’s edit icon in the Address Mapping
screen to display the screen shown next.
Figure 72 Network > NAT > Address Mapping: Edit
134
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 47 Network > NAT > Address Mapping: Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Type
Choose the port mapping type from one of the following.
One-to-One: One-to-One mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note
that port numbers do not change for One-to-one NAT mapping type.
Many-to-One: Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP
address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL's Single User
Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only.
Many-to-Many Overload: Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP
addresses to shared global IP addresses.
Many-to-Many No Overload: Many-to-Many No Overload mode maps each local IP
address to unique global IP addresses.
Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT
to be accessible to the outside world.
Local Start IP
Address
This is the starting local IP address (ILA). Local IP addresses are N/A for Server port
mapping.
Local End IP
Address
This is the end local IP address (ILA). If your rule is for all local IP addresses, then enter
0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP
address.
This field is N/A for One-to-One and Server mapping types.
Global Start IP
Address
This is the starting global IP address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP
address from your ISP.
Global End IP
Address
This is the ending global IP address (IGA). This field is N/A for One-to-One, Many-toOne and Server mapping types.
Server Mapping
Set
Click this link to go to the Port Forwarding screen to edit a port forwarding set that you
have selected in the Server Mapping Set field.
Edit Details
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
9.5 The ALG Screen
Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls
to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream.
When the Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the Device’s private
IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an
outbound proxy if your Device is behind a SIP ALG.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
135
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Use this screen to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device. To access this screen, click
Network > NAT > ALG.
Figure 73 Network > NAT > ALG
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 48 Network > NAT > ALG
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable SIP ALG
Select this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and addressmapping rules.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
9.6 NAT Technical Reference
This chapter contains more information regarding NAT.
9.6.1 NAT Definitions
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers
of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside
hosts.
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address
of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in
a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP
address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table
summarizes this information.
Table 49 NAT Definitions
136
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Inside
This refers to the host on the LAN.
Outside
This refers to the host on the WAN.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 49 NAT Definitions (continued)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Local
This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN.
Global
This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN.
NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host.
9.6.2 What NAT Does
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note
that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.
The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP.
In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local
network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Manyto-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping – see Table 50 on page 139), NAT offers the
additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your Device filters out all incoming
inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address
translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT).
9.6.3 How NAT Works
Each packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets,
the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global
Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination
address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local)
IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It
replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and
Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The
Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have
their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this.
Figure 74 How NAT Works
NAT Table
LAN
Inside Local
IP Address
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.11
192.168.1.12
192.168.1.13
192.168.1.13
192.168.1.12
SA
SA
192.168.1.10
IGA1
Inside Local
Address (ILA)
192.168.1.11
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Inside Global
IP Address
IGA 1
IGA 2
IGA 3
IGA 4
WAN
Inside Global
Address (IGA)
192.168.1.10
137
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
9.6.4 NAT Application
The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs
using IP alias) behind the Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks.
Figure 75 NAT Application With IP Alias
9.6.5 NAT Mapping Types
NAT supports five types of IP/port mapping. They are:
• One to One: In One-to-One mode, the Device maps one local IP address to one global IP
address.
• Many to One: In Many-to-One mode, the Device maps multiple local IP addresses to one global
IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (for instance, PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL’s Single
User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported (the SUA Only option in today’s
routers).
• Many to Many Overload: In Many-to-Many Overload mode, the Device maps the multiple local
IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
• Many-to-Many No Overload: In Many-to-Many No Overload mode, the Device maps each local
IP address to a unique global IP address.
• Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be
accessible to the outside world.
Port numbers do not change for One-to-One and Many-to-Many No Overload NAT mapping
types.
138
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following table summarizes these types.
Table 50 NAT Mapping Types
TYPE
IP MAPPING
One-to-One
ILA1 IGA1
Many-to-One (SUA/PAT)
ILA1 IGA1
ILA2 IGA1
…
Many-to-Many Overload
ILA1 IGA1
ILA2 IGA2
ILA3 IGA1
ILA4 IGA2
…
Many-to-Many No Overload
ILA1 IGA1
ILA2 IGA2
ILA3 IGA3
…
Server
Server 1 IP IGA1
Server 2 IP IGA1
Server 3 IP IGA1
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
139
Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)
140
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
10
Firewalls
10.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the Device firewall. Use these screens to
enable and configure the firewall that protects your Device and network from attacks by hackers on
the Internet and control access to it. By default the firewall:
• allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks.
• blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN.
The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant
Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2).
However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4).
Figure 76 Default Firewall Action
WAN
LAN
10.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens
• Use he
t General screen to enable firewall and/or triangle route on the Device, and set the
default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules.
• Use he
t Rules screen to view the configured firewall rules and add, edit or remove a firewall rule.
10.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall
DoS
Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the
Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer
have access to network resources. The Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
all known DoS attacks.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
141
Chapter 10 Firewalls
Anti-Probing
If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your Device, an ICMP response packet
is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the Device exists. The Device
supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps
outsiders from discovering your Device when unsupported ports are probed.
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a message control and error-reporting protocol
between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams,
but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application
user.
10.2 The Firewall General Screen
Use this screen to configure the firewall settings. Click Security > Firewall to display the following
screen.
Figure 77 Security > Firewall > General
142
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Firewalls
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 51 Security > Firewall > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active Firewall
Select this check box to activate the firewall. The Device performs access control and
protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated.
Bypass Triangle
Route
If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the Device’s
LAN IP address, return traffic may not go through the Device. This is called an
asymmetrical or “triangle” route. This causes the Device to reset the connection, as the
connection has not been acknowledged.
Select this check box to have the Device permit the use of asymmetrical route topology
on the network (not reset the connection).
Note: Allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN
without passing through the Device. A better solution is to use IP alias to put the
Device and the backup gateway on separate subnets. See Section 10.4.4.1 on
page 151 for an example.
Packet Direction
This is the direction of travel of packets (LAN to Router, LAN to WAN, WAN to
Router, WAN to LAN).
Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they
apply. For example, LAN to Router means packets traveling from a computer/subnet
on the LAN to the Device itself.
Default Action
Use the drop-down list boxes to select the default action that the firewall is to take on
packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of the firewall
rules.
Select Drop to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an
ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender.
Select Reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet (for a TCP packet) or an
ICMP destination-unreachable message (for a UDP packet) to the sender.
Select Permit to allow the passage of the packets.
Expand...
Click this to display more information.
Basic...
Click this to display less information.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
10.3 The Firewall Rule Screen
Note: The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in turn.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
143
Chapter 10 Firewalls
Click Security > Firewall > Rules to bring up the following screen. This screen displays a list of
the configured firewall rules. Note the order in which the rules are listed.
Figure 78 Security > Firewall > Rules
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 Security > Firewall > Rules
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Firewall Rules
Storage Space in
Use
This read-only bar shows how much of the Device's memory for recording firewall rules it
is currently using. When you are using 80% or less of the storage space, the bar is green.
When the amount of space used is over 80%, the bar is red.
Packet Direction
Use the drop-down list box to select a direction of travel of packets for which you want to
configure firewall rules.
Create a new
rule after rule
number
Select an index number and click Add to add a new firewall rule after the selected index
number. For example, if you select “6”, your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous
rule 7 (if there is one) becomes rule 8.
The following read-only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to traffic
traveling in the selected packet direction. The firewall rules that you configure
(summarized below) take priority over the general firewall action settings in the General
screen.
144
This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are
applied in turn.
Active
This field displays whether a firewall is turned on or not. Select the check box to enable the
rule. Clear the check box to disable the rule.
Source IP
This drop-down list box displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this
firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to
Any.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Firewalls
Table 52 Security > Firewall > Rules (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Destination IP
This drop-down list box displays the destination addresses or ranges of addresses to which
this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is
equivalent to Any.
Service
This drop-down list box displays the services to which this firewall rule applies.
Action
This field displays whether the firewall silently discards packets (Drop), discards packets
and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender
(Reject) or allows the passage of packets (Permit).
Schedule
This field tells you whether a schedule is specified (Yes) or not (No).
Modify
Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing firewall rule. A window displays asking you to
confirm that you want to delete the firewall rule. Note that subsequent firewall rules move
up by one when you take this action.
Order
Click the Move icon to display the Move the rule to field. Type a number in the Move the
rule to field and click the Move button to move the rule to the number that you typed.
The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
145
Chapter 10 Firewalls
10.3.1 Configuring Firewall Rules
Use this screen to configure firewall rules. In the Rules screen, select an index number and click
Add or click a rule’s Edit icon to display this screen and refer to the following table for information
on the labels.
Figure 79 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 53 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Edit Rule
Active
Select this option to enable this firewall rule.
Action for Matched
Packet
Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (Drop), deny and send an
ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of (Reject) or allow the
passage of (Permit) packets that match this rule.
Source/Destination Address
Address Type
146
Do you want your rule to apply to packets with a particular (single) IP, a range of IP
addresses (for instance, 192.168.1.10 to 192.169.1.50), a subnet or any IP address?
Select an option from the drop-down list box that includes: Single Address, Range
Address, Subnet Address and Any Address.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Firewalls
Table 53 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Start IP Address
Enter the single IP address or the starting IP address in a range here.
End IP Address
Enter the ending IP address in a range here.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask here, if applicable.
Add >>
Click Add >> to add a new address to the Source or Destination Address box. You
can add multiple addresses, ranges of addresses, and/or subnets.
Edit <<
To edit an existing source or destination address, select it from the box and click Edit
<<.
Delete
Highlight an existing source or destination address from the Source or Destination
Address box above and click Delete to remove it.
Service
Available / Selected
Services
Highlight a service from the Available Services box on the left, then click Add >> to
add it to the Selected Services box on the right. To remove a service, highlight it in
the Selected Services box on the right, then click Remove.
Edit Customized
Service
Click the Edit Customized Services link to bring up the screen that you use to
configure a new custom service that is not in the predefined list of services.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
10.3.2 Customized Services
Configure customized services and port numbers not predefined by the Device. For a
comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number
Authority) website. Click the Edit Customized Services link while editing a firewall rule to
configure a custom service port. This displays the following screen.
Figure 80 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
147
Chapter 10 Firewalls
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 54 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
No.
This is the number of your customized port. Click a rule’s number of a service to go to the
Firewall Customized Services Config screen to configure or edit a customized service.
Name
This is the name of your customized service.
Protocol
This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) that defines your customized service.
Port
This is the port number or range that defines your customized service.
Back
Click this to return to the Firewall Edit Rule screen.
10.3.3 Configuring a Customized Service
Use this screen to add a customized rule or edit an existing rule. Click a rule number in the
Firewall Customized Services screen to display the following screen.
Figure 81 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Config
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Config
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Config
Service Name
Type a unique name for your custom port.
Service Type
Choose the IP port (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) that defines your customized port from the
drop down list box.
Port Configuration
148
Type
Click Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your
customized service.
Port Number
Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized
service.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
Delete
Click this to delete the current rule.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Firewalls
10.4 Firewall Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
10.4.1 Firewall Rules Overview
Your customized rules take precedence and override the Device’s default settings. The Device
checks the source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic against
the firewall rules (in the order you list them). When the traffic matches a rule, the Device takes the
action specified in the rule.
Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply:
• LAN ot R
outer
• WAN ot LAN
• LAN to WAN
• WAN to Router
Note: The LAN includes both the LAN port and the WLAN.
By default, the Device’s stateful packet inspection allows packets traveling in the following
directions:
• LAN ot R
outer
These rules specify which computers on the LAN can manage the Device (remote management).
Note: You can also configure the remote management settings to allow only a specific
computer to manage the Device.
• LAN ot W
AN
These rules specify which computers on the LAN can access which computers or services on the
WAN.
By default, the Device’s stateful packet inspection drops packets traveling in the following
directions:
• WAN ot LAN
These rules specify which computers on the WAN can access which computers or services on the
LAN.
Note: You also need to configure NAT port forwarding (or full featured NAT address
mapping rules) to allow computers on the WAN to access devices on the LAN.
• WAN ot Router
By default the Device stops computers on the WAN from managing the Device. You could
configure one of these rules to allow a WAN computer to manage the Device.
Note: You also need to configure the remote management settings to allow a WAN
computer to manage the Device.
You may define additional rules and sets or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme
caution in doing so.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
149
Chapter 10 Firewalls
For example, you may create rules to:
• Block certain types of traffic, such as IRC (Internet Relay Chat), from the LAN to the Internet.
• Allow certain types of traffic, such as Lotus Notes database synchronization, from specific hosts
on the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN.
• Allow everyone except your competitors to access a web server.
• Restrict use of certain protocols, such as Telnet, to authorized users on the LAN.
These custom rules work by comparing the source IP address, destination IP address and IP
protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator. Your customized rules take
precedence and override the Device’s default rules.
10.4.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall
Change the default password via web configurator.
Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way.
Limit who can access your router.
Don't enable any local service (such as telnet or FTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could
present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse
the enabled services to access the firewall or the network.
For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to
communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the
services at specific interfaces.
Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active.
Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room.
10.4.3 Security Considerations
Note: Incorrectly configuring the firewall may block valid access or introduce security
risks to the Device and your protected network. Use caution when creating or
deleting firewall rules and test your rules after you configure them.
Consider these security ramifications before creating a rule:
150
Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet? For example, if IRC
is blocked, are there users that require this service?
Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific? For example, if IRC is blocked for all users, will
a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective?
Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security
vulnerability? For example, if FTP ports (TCP 20, 21) are allowed from the Internet to the LAN,
Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers.
Does this rule conflict with any existing rules?
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Firewalls
Once these questions have been answered, adding rules is simply a matter of entering the
information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens.
10.4.4 Triangle Route
When the firewall is on, your Device acts as a secure gateway between your LAN and the Internet.
In an ideal network topology, all incoming and outgoing network traffic passes through the Device
to protect your LAN against attacks.
Figure 82 Ideal Firewall Setup
WAN
LAN
10.4.4.1 The “Triangle Route” Problem
A traffic route is a path for sending or receiving data packets between two Ethernet devices. You
may have more than one connection to the Internet (through one or more ISPs). If an alternate
gateway is on the LAN (and its IP address is in the same subnet as the Device’s LAN IP address),
the “triangle route” (also called asymmetrical route) problem may occur. The steps below describe
the “triangle route” problem.
A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending out a SYN packet to a receiving server on
the WAN.
The Device reroutes the SYN packet through Gateway A on the LAN to the WAN.
The reply from the WAN goes directly to the computer on the LAN without going through the
Device.
As a result, the Device resets the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged.
Figure 83 “Triangle Route” Problem
WAN
LAN
ISP 1
ISP 2
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
151
Chapter 10 Firewalls
10.4.4.2 Solving the “Triangle Route” Problem
If you have the Device allow triangle route sessions, traffic from the WAN can go directly to a LAN
computer without passing through the Device and its firewall protection.
Another solution is to use IP alias. IP alias allows you to partition your network into logical sections
over the same Ethernet interface. Your Device supports up to three logical LAN interfaces with the
Device being the gateway for each logical network.
It’s like having multiple LAN networks that actually use the same physical cables and ports. By
putting your LAN and Gateway A in different subnets, all returning network traffic must pass
through the Device to your LAN. The following steps describe such a scenario.
A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the
WAN.
The Device reroutes the packet to Gateway A, which is in Subnet 2.
The reply from the WAN goes to the Device.
The Device then sends it to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1.
Figure 84 IP Alias
LAN
Subnet 1
WAN
ISP 1
ISP 2
Subnet 2
152
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
11
Filters
11.1 Overview
This chapter introduces three types of filters supported by the Device. You can configure rules to
restrict traffic by IP addresses, MAC addresses, application types and/or URLs.
11.1.1 What You Can Do in the Filter Screens
• Use he
t URL Filter screen (Section 11.2 on page 154) to block access to web sites.
• Use he
t Application Filter screen (Section 11.3 on page 154) to allow or deny traffic from
certain types of applications.
• Use he
t IP/MAC Filter screen (Section 11.4 on page 156) to create IP/MAC filter rules.
11.1.2 What You Need to Know About Filtering
URL
The URL (Uniform Resource Locator) identifies and helps locates resources on a network. On the
Internet the URL is the web address that you type in the address bar of your Internet browser, for
example “http://www.zyxel.com”.
IP/MAC Filter Structure
An IP/MAC filter set consists of one or more filter rules. The Device allows you to configure each
type of filter with its own set of filter rules.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
153
Chapter 11 Filters
11.2 The URL Filter Screen
Use this screen to block websites by URL. Click Security > Filter > URL Filter. The screen appears
as shown.
Figure 85 Security > Filter > URL Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 56 Access Management > Filter (URL)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
URL Filter Editing
URL Filter
Use this field to enable or disable the URL filter.
URL Index
Select the index number of the filter.
Individual active
Select Yes to make the filter active and No to make it inactive.
URL
Enter the URL for the Device to block.
URL Filter Listing
Index
This is the index number of the filter rule.
URL
This is the URL you have configured the Device to block.
Save
Click this to save your changes.
Delete
Click this to remove the filter rule.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
11.3 The Application Filter Screen
Use this screen to allow or deny traffic for certain types of applications. The application filter
provides a convenient way to manage the use of various applications on the network.
154
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Filters
Click Security > Filter > Application Filter. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 86 Security > Filter > Application Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 57 Access Management > Filter (Application)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Application Filter Editing
Application Filter
Use this field to enable or disable the application filter.
ICQ
Use this field to allow or deny ICQ traffic.
MSN
Use this field to allow or deny MSN traffic.
YMSG
Use this field to allow or deny Yahoo Messenger traffic
Real Audio/Video
Use this field to allow or deny transferring RealPlayer format files.
Save
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
155
Chapter 11 Filters
11.4 The IP/MAC Filter Screen
Use this screen to create and apply IP/MAC filters. Click Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter. The
screen appears as shown.
Figure 87 Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 58 Access Management > Filter (IP/MAC)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP/MAC Filter Rule Editing
IP/MAC Filter Set Index
Select the index number of the filter rule.
Active
Use this field to enable or disable the rule.
Interface
Select the PVC to which to apply the filter.
Direction
Apply the filter to Both, Incoming or Outgoing traffic direction.
Rule Type
Select IP or MAC type to configure the rule.
Use the IP Filter to block traffic by IP addresses.
Use the MAC Filter to block traffic by MAC address.
156
Source IP Address
Enter the source IP address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is
ignored if it is 0.0.0.0.
Subnet Mask
Enter the IP subnet mask for the source IP address
Port Number
Enter the source port of the packets that you wish to filter. The range of this
field is 0 to 65535. This field is ignored if it is 0.
Destination IP Address
Enter the destination IP address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is
ignored if it is 0.0.0.0.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Filters
Table 58 Access Management > Filter (IP/MAC) (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Subnet Mask
Enter the IP subnet mask for the destination IP address.
Port Number
Enter the destination port of the packets that you wish to filter. The range of
this field is 0 to 65535. This field is ignored if it is 0.
Protocol
Select ICMP, TCP or UDP for the upper layer protocol.
MAC Address
This field is only available when you select MAC in the Rule Type field.
Enter the MAC address of the packets you wish to filter.
IP/MAC Filter Listing
IP/MAC Filter Set Index
Select the index number of the filter set from the drop-down list box.
Interface
This is the interface that the filter set applies to.
Direction
The filter set applies to this traffic direction.
This is the index number of the rule in a filter set.
Active
This field shows whether the rule is activated.
Src IP/Mask
This is the source IP address and subnet mask when you select IP as the rule
type.
Dest IP/Mask
This is the destination IP address and subnet mask.
Mac Address
This is the MAC address when you select MAC as the rule type.
Src Port
This is the source port number.
Dest Port
This is the destination port number.
Protocol
This is the upper layer protocol.
Save
Click this to save your changes.
Delete
Click this to remove the filter rule.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
157
Chapter 11 Filters
158
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
12
Static Route
12.1 Overview
The Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN
to the Internet. To have the Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway,
use static routes.
For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the Device’s LAN interface. The
Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Device’s default gateway (R1). You
create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create
another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the
LAN.
Figure 88 Example of Static Routing Topology
R1
LAN
WAN
R3
R2
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
159
Chapter 12 Static Route
12.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens
Use the Static Route screens (Section 12.2 on page 160) to view and configure IP static routes on
the Device.
12.2 The Static Route Screen
Use this screen to view the static route rules. Click Advanced > Static Route to open the Static
Route screen.
Figure 89 Advanced > Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 59 Advanced > Static Route
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the number of an individual static route.
Destination
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always
based on network number.
Netmask
This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination.
Gateway
This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same
network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to
their destinations.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the Device.
Click the Remove icon to remove a static route from the Device. A window displays asking
you to confirm that you want to delete the route.
160
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Static Route
12.2.1 Static Route Edit
Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route. Select a static route index
number and click Edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 90 Advanced > Static Route: Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 60 Advanced > Static Route: Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Static Route Setup
Destination IP
Address
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always
based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet
mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be
identical to the host ID.
IP Subnet Mask
Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same
network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to
their destinations.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
161
Chapter 12 Static Route
162
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
13
Port Binding
13.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to configure the port binding settings.
Port binding allows you to aggregate port connections into logical groups. You may bind WAN PVCs
to Ethernet ports and WLANs to specify how traffic is forwarded. Different ATM QoS settings can be
specified for each WAN PVC to meet bandwidth requirements for the type of traffic to be
transferred.
For example, three port binding groups could be created on the device (R1) for three different WAN
PVC connections. The first PVC (PVC0) is for non time-sensitive data traffic. The second and third
PVCs (PVC1 and PVC2) are for time sensitive Media-On-Demand (MOD) video traffic and VoIP
traffic, respectively.
Figure 91 Port Binding Groups
Data
PVC0
R1
PVC1
VoIP
R1
S1
S2
MOD
PVC2
R1
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
163
Chapter 13 Port Binding
If a WAN PVC is bound to an ethernet port, traffic from the ethernet port will only be forwarded
through the specified WAN PVC and vice versa. If a port is not in a port binding group, traffic to and
from the port will be forwarded according to the routing table.
13.1.1 What You Can Do in the Port Binding Screens
• Use he
t Port Binding screen (Section 13.2 on page 164) to activate port binding and set up port
binding groups.
• Use he
t Port Binding Summary screen (Section 13.2.1 on page 165) to view configured port
binding groups.
13.2 The Port Binding Screen
Use this screen to activate port binding and set up port binding groups. Click Advanced > Port
Binding to display the following screen.
Figure 92 Advanced > Port Binding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 61 Advanced > Port Binding
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port Binding
Active
Activate or deactivate the port binding feature.
Group Index
Select the index number for the port binding group.
When a port is assigned to a port binding group, traffic will be forwarded to the other
ports in the group, but not to ports in other groups. If a port is not included in any
groups, traffic will be forwarded according to the routing table.
164
ATM VCs
Select the ATM VC (PVC) to include in the port binding group. Each ATM VC can only
be binded to one group.
Ethernet
Select the Ethernet (Eth) ports to include in the port binding group. Each Ethernet
port can only be binded to one group.
WLAN
Select the WLAN (AP) connections to include in the port binding group. Additional APs
can be enabled on the More AP screen (Section 8.3 on page 106).
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Port Binding
Table 61 Advanced > Port Binding (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Group Summary
Port Binding
Summary
Click this to view a summary of configured port binding groups.
Apply
Add the selected port binding group configuration.
Delete
Delete the selected port binding group configuration.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
13.2.1 Port Binding Summary screen
Use this screen to view configured port binding groups.
In the Port Binding screen, click the PortBinding Summary button in the Group Summary
section to display the following screen.
Figure 93 Advanced > Port Binding > PortBinding Summary
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 62 Advanced > Port Binding > PortBinding Summary
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Group ID
This field displays the group index number.
Group port
This field displays the ports included in the group.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
165
Chapter 13 Port Binding
166
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
14
PVID Setting
14.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to assign ports into Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN) and configure
frame tagging settings.
A VLAN allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. A VLAN group can
be treated as an individual device. Each group can have its own rules about where and how to
forward traffic. You can assign any ports on the Device to a VLAN group and configure the settings
for the group.
Figure 94 802.1Q
802.1Q
Ports
VLAN Groups
14.1.1 What You Can Do in the pvid Setting Screen
• Use he
t pvid Setting screen (Section 14.2 on page 168) to configure the PVID and tagging
settings.
14.1.2 What You Need to Know About 802.1Q
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
Tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of
a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the device on which they were created. The VLAN
ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to
process the frame across the network.
Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames
Each port on the device is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. To forward a frame from
an 802.1Q VLAN-aware device to an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware device, the Device first decides where
to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLANunaware device to an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch, the Device first decides where to forward the
frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port's default VID. The default PVID is
VLAN 1 for all ports, but this can be changed.
Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress port on a per-VLAN, perport basis (recall that a port can belong to multiple VLANs). If the tagging on the egress port is
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
167
Chapter 14 PVID Setting
enabled for the VID of a frame, then the frame is transmitted as a tagged frame; otherwise, it is
transmitted as an untagged frame.
14.2 The pvid Setting Screen
Use this screen to activate VLAN and set up VLANs. Click Advanced > pvid Setting to display the
following screen.
Figure 95 Advanced > pvid Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 63 Advanced > pvid Setting
168
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Activate or deactivate the VLAN feature.
PORT
This field displays the types of ports available to join the VLAN group.
PVID
Assign a VLAN ID for the port. The valid VID range is between 1 and 4094. The Device
assigns the PVID to untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port.
TAG
Select TAG if you want the port to tag all outgoing traffic trasmitted through this
VLAN. You select this if you want to create VLANs across different devices and just
the Device.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
15
Quality of Service (QoS)
15.1 Overview
Use the QoS screen to set up your Device to use QoS for traffic management.
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and
the networking methods used to control bandwidth. QoS allows the Device to group and prioritize
application traffic and fine-tune network performance.
Without QoS, all traffic data are equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This
can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical
applications such as video-on-demand.
The Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned
with a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priorities if there is congestion,
allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both
those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as
Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as
Internet radio or streaming video.
In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 50 Mbps.
You configure a classifier to assign the highest priority queue (6) to VoIP traffic from the LAN
interface, so that voice traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Traffic from
the boss’s IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) is mapped to queue 5. Traffic that does not
match these two classes are assigned priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on
the Device.
Figure 96 QoS Example
VoIP: Queue 6
DSL
50 Mbps
Boss: Queue 5
IP=192.168.1.23
15.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens
• Use he
t QoS screen (Section 15.2 on page 170) to configure QoS settings on the Device.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
169
Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS)
• Use he
t QoS Settings Summary screen (Section 15.2.1 on page 173) to check the summary of
QoS rules and actions you configured for the Device.
15.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS
802.1p
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given
the same priority. 802.1p is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of
traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use 802.1p to give different priorities to
different packet types.
Tagging and Marking
In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value,
IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes
through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide
specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker.
Finding Out More
See Section 15.3 on page 174 for advanced technical information on QoS.
15.2 The QoS Screen
Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and have the Device assign priority levels to traffic
according to the port range, IEEE 802.1p priority level and/or IP precedence.
170
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS)
Click Advanced Setup > QoS to open the screen as shown next.
Figure 97 Advanced Setup > QoS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 64 Advanced Setup > QoS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Quality of Service
QoS
Use this field to turn on QoS to improve your network performance.
You can give priority to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface.
Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low
priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other
applications.
Discipline
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Select weighted round-robin (WRR) scheduling to allow packets of all priorities to
transmit depending on their assigned relative weight. Select Strict Priority to require
traffic transmit in order of priority.
171
Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 64 Advanced Setup > QoS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WRR Weight
If you selected WRR, specify the WRR weight for each queue index. A higher weight
indicates the traffic will receive more bandwidth while a lower weight indicates it will
receive less bandwidth. For example, 15 is receives more bandwidth than 1.
Discipline Save
Click this to save the discipline.
Rule&Action
Summary
Click this to open a summary table showing the QoS settings. See Section 15.2.1 on page
173 for more details.
Rule
Rule Index
Select the rule’s index number from the drop-down list box.
Active
Use this field to enable or disable the rule.
Application
Select an application from the drop-down list box. The Destination Port Range and
Protocol ID fields may change depending on the type of applications you choose.
Physical Ports
Select the port to apply the rule to.
Destination MAC
Type a destination MAC address here. QoS is then applied to traffic containing this
destination MAC address. Leave it blank to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
IP
Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation. QoS is then applied to traffic
containing this destination IP address. A blank destination IP address means any
destination IP address.
Mask
Enter a destination subnet mask here.
Port Range
Either use the default value set by the application you choose, or enter the port number
to which the rule should be applied.
Source MAC
Type a source MAC address here. QoS is then applied to traffic containing this source MAC
address. Leave it blank to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
IP
Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation. QoS is then applied to traffic
containing this source IP address. A blank source IP address means any source IP
address.
Mask
Enter a source subnet mask here.
Port Range
Enter the port number to which the rule should be applied. 0 means any source port
number. See Appendix F on page 291 for some common services and port numbers.
Protocol ID
Select an IP protocol type from the drop-down list box.
Vlan ID Range
Enter the source VLAN ID in this field.
IPP/DS Field
Select IPP/TOS to specify an IP precedence range and type of services.
Select DSCP to specify a DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) range.
IP Precedence
Range
Enter a range from 0 to 7 for IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority and seven is the
highest.
Type of Service
Select a type of service from the drop-down list box.
Available options are: Normal service, Minimize delay, Maximize throughput,
Maximize reliability and Minimize monetary cost.
DSCP Range
Specify a DSCP number between 0 and 63 in this field.
802.1p
Select a priority level (0 to 7) from the drop-down list box.
Action
IPP/DS Field
Select IPP/TOS to specify an IP precedence range and type of services.
Select DSCP to specify a DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) range.
IP Precedence
Remarking
172
Enter a range from 0 to 7 to re-assign IP precedence to matched traffic. Zero is the
lowest priority and seven is the highest.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 64 Advanced Setup > QoS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Type of Service
Remarking
Select a type of service to re-assign the priority level to matched traffic.
DSCP Remarking
Available options are: Normal service, Minimize delay, Maximize throughput,
Maximize reliability and Minimize monetary cost.
Specify a DSCP number between 0 and 63 to re-assign the priority level to matched
traffic.
802.1p Remarking Select a priority level (0 to 7) to re-assign the priority level to matched traffic.
Queue #
Specify a Low, Medium, High or Highest queue tag to matched traffic. Traffic assigned
to a higher queue gets through faster while traffic in lower queues is dropped when there
is network congestion.
ADD
Click this to add the rule.
DELETE
Click this to remove the rule.
CANCEL
Click this to restore previously saved settings.
15.2.1 The QoS Settings Summary Screen
Use this screen to display a summary of rules and actions configured for the Device. In the
Advanced > QoS screen, click the Rule&Action Summary button to open the following screen.
Figure 98 Advanced Setup > QoS > QoS Settings Summary
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 65 Advanced Setup > QoS > Rule&Action Summary
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Rules
This is the rule’s index number.
Active
This shows whether the rule is enabled or disabled.
Physical Ports
This is the physical port associated with the rule.
Destination MAC
and IP/Mask Port
Ranges
This is the port range for destination MAC address and IP address.
Source MAC and IP/
Mask Port Ranges
This is the port range for source MAC address and IP address.
Protocol ID
This is the protocol ID associated with the rule.
VLAN ID
This is the VLAN ID associated with the rule.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
173
Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 65 Advanced Setup > QoS > Rule&Action Summary
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IPP/TOS (DSCP)
This shows the IPP/TOS or DSCP settings.
802.1p
This is the 802.1p priority level.
Actions
IPP/TOS (DSCP)
Remarking
The Device re-assigns the priority values specified in this field to matched traffic.
802.1p Remarking
The Device re-assigns the priority levels specified in this field to matched traffic.
Queue #
The Device assigns the queue level specified in this field to matched traffic.
15.3 QoS Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
15.3.1 IEEE 802.1p
IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The
following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates
the 802.1p).
Table 66 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type
PRIORITY
LEVEL
TRAFFIC TYPE
Level 7
Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Level 6
Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in
delay).
Level 5
Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Level 4
Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network
Architecture) transactions.
Level 3
Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important
business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Level 2
This is for “spare bandwidth”.
Level 1
This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are
allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Level 0
Typically used for best-effort traffic.
15.3.2 IP Precedence
Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a
layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP
header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is
the lowest priority level and seven is the highest.
174
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS)
15.3.3 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment
If you enable QoS on the Device, the Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority
level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class.
The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the Device. On the
Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index
queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Table 67 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping
LAYER 2
LAYER 3
PRIORITY
QUEUE
IEEE 802.1P USER
PRIORITY
(ETHERNET
PRIORITY)
TOS (IP
PRECEDENCE)
DSCP
000000
000000
>1100
001110
250~1100
IP PACKET
LENGTH (BYTE)
001100
001010
001000
010110
010100
010010
010000
011110
<250
011100
011010
011000
100110
100100
100010
100000
101110
101000
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
110000
111000
175
Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS)
176
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
16
Dynamic DNS Setup
16.1 Overview
Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic
DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access
your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance
myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an
IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to
call you even if they don't know your IP address.
First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for
people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name.
The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.
16.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen
Use the Dynamic DNS screen (Section 16.2 on page 178) to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS
settings on the Device.
16.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS
DYNDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same
IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example,
www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.
If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
177
Chapter 16 Dynamic DNS Setup
16.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen
Use this screen to change your Device’s DDNS. Click Advanced > Dynamic DNS. The screen
appears as shown.
Figure 99 Advanced > Dynamic DNS
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 68 Advanced > Dynamic DNS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Dynamic DNS Setup
Active Dynamic
DNS
Select this check box to use dynamic DNS.
Service Provider
This is the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider.
Dynamic DNS
Type
Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service
provider.
Host Name
Type the domain name assigned to your Device by your Dynamic DNS provider.
You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (",").
178
User Name
Type your user name.
Password
Type the password assigned to you.
Enable Wildcard
Option
Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
17
Remote Management
17.1 Overview
Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which Device
interface (if any) from which computers.
The following figure shows remote management of the Device coming in from the WAN.
Figure 100 Remote Management From the WAN
LAN
WAN
HTTP
Telnet
Note: When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN, you
still need to configure an IP filter rule to allow access.
You may manage your Device from a remote location via:
• Internet (WAN only)
• LAN n
oly
• LAN n
ad WAN
• None (Disable)
To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding Service Access
field.
You may only have one remote management session running at a time. The Device automatically
disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management
session of higher priority starts. The priorities for the different types of remote management
sessions are as follows.
Telnet
HTTP
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
179
Chapter 17 Remote Management
17.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens
• Use he
t WWW screen (Section 17.2 on page 181) to configure through which interface(s) and
from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the Device.
• Use he
t Telnet screen (Section 17.3 on page 181) to configure through which interface(s) and
from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the Device.
• Use he
t FTP screen (Section 17.4 on page 182) to configure through which interface(s) and from
which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the Device.
• Your Device can act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor
the Device through the network. Use the SNMP screen (see Section 17.5 on page 183) to
configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use SNMP to
access the Device.
• Use he
t DNS screen (Section 17.6 on page 185) to configure through which interface(s) and
from which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the Device.
• Use he
t ICMP screen (Section 17.7 on page 185) to set whether or not your Device will respond
to pings and probes for services that you have not made available.
17.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management
Remote Management Limitations
Remote management does not work when:
• You have not enabled that service on the interface in the corresponding remote management
screen.
• You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens.
• The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client IP address. If
it does not match, the Device will disconnect the session immediately.
• There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running.
You may only have one remote management session running at one time.
• There is a firewall rule that blocks it.
Remote Management and NAT
When NAT is enabled:
• Use the Device’s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN.
• Use the Device’s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.
System Timeout
There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The
Device automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this
timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling.
180
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Remote Management
17.2 The WWW Screen
Use this screen to specify how to connect to the Device from a web browser, such as Internet
Explorer.
17.2.1 Configuring the WWW Screen
Click Advanced > Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen.
Figure 101 Advanced > Remote MGMT > WWW
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 69 Advanced > Remote Management > WWW
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
You may change the server port number for a service, if needed. However, you must use
the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the Device using this
service.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the Device
using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the Device using this service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to
access the Device using this service.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
17.3 The Telnet Screen
You can use Telnet to access the Device’s command line interface. Specify which interfaces allow
Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
181
Chapter 17 Remote Management
Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > Telnet tab to display the screen as shown.
Figure 102 Advanced > Remote MGMT > Telnet
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 70 Advanced > Remote Management > Telnet
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use
the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the Device using this
service.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the Device
using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the Device using this service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to
access the Device using this service.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
17.4 The FTP Screen
You can use FTP (File Transfer Protocol) to upload and download the Device’s firmware and
configuration files. Please see the User’s Guide chapter on firmware and configuration file
maintenance for details. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client.
Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow FTP access and from which IP address the access
can come. To change your Device’s FTP settings, click Advanced > Remote MGMT > FTP. The
screen appears as shown.
Figure 103 Advanced > Remote MGMT > FTP
182
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Remote Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 71 Advanced > Remote MGMT > FTP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
You may change the server port number for a service, if needed. However, you must use
the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the Device using this
service.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the Device
using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the Device using this service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to
access the Device using this service.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
17.5 The SNMP Screen
Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information
between network devices. Your Device supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager
station to manage and monitor the Device through the network. The Device supports SNMP version
one (SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management
operation.
Figure 104 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the Device). An
agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form
compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
183
Chapter 17 Remote Management
network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed
devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of
information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of
packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of
managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing
these objects.
17.5.1 Configuring SNMP
To change your Device’s SNMP settings, click Advanced > Remote MGMT > SNMP tab. The
screen appears as shown.
Figure 105 Advanced > Remote MGMT > SNMP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 72 Advanced > Remote MGMT > SNMP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SNMP
Server Port
The SNMP agent listens on port 161 by default. If you change the SNMP server port to a
different number on the Device, for example 8161, then you must notify people who need
to access the Device SNMP agent to use the same port.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the Device using this
service.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to access the SNMP agent on the
Device.
Select All to allow any computer to access the SNMP agent.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to
access the SNMP agent.
SNMP Configuration
184
Get Community
Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext
requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests.
Set Community
Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the
management station. The default is public and allows all requests.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Reset
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Remote Management
17.6 The DNS Screen
Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice
versa. Refer to Chapter 7 on page 85 for background information.
Use this screen to set from which IP address the Device will accept DNS queries and on which
interface it can send them your Device’s DNS settings. This feature is not available when the Device
is set to bridge mode. Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > DNS to change your Device’s DNS
settings.
Figure 106 Advanced > Remote Management > DNS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 73 Advanced > Remote Management > DNS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
The DNS service port number is 53 and can be changed here.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may send DNS queries to the Device.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the
Device.
Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the Device.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to send
DNS queries to the Device.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
17.7 The ICMP Screen
To change your Device’s security settings, click Advanced > Remote MGMT > ICMP. The screen
appears as shown.
If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your Device, an ICMP response packet
is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the Device exists. Your Device
supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps
outsiders from discovering your Device when unsupported ports are probed.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
185
Chapter 17 Remote Management
Note: If you want your device to respond to pings and requests for unauthorized services,
you may also need to configure the firewall anti probing settings to match.
Figure 107 Advanced > Remote Management > ICMP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 74 Advanced > Remote Management > ICMP
186
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-reporting protocol
between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP)
datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly
apparent to the application user.
Respond to Ping on
The Device will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected.
Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply to incoming
WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and
WAN Ping requests.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
18
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
18.1 Overview
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for
simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a
network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network.
In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
18.1.1 What You Can Do in the UPnP Screen
Use the UPnP screen (Section 18.2 on page 188) to enable UPnP on the Device and allow UPnPenabled applications to automatically configure the Device.
18.1.2 What You Need to Know About UPnP
Identifying UPnP Devices
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP
compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a
UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP
network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the
network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions.
NAT traversal allows the following:
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.
See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT.
Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening
firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also
be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
187
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For
security reasons, the Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only.
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration.
Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
UPnP and ZyXEL
ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP™
Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD)
1.0.
See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP.
18.2 The UPnP Screen
Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your Device. Click Advanced > UPnP to
display the screen shown next.
See Section 18.1 on page 187 for more information.
Figure 108 Advanced > UPnP > General
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 75 Advanced > UPnP > General
188
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active the Universal Plug and
Play (UPnP) Feature
Select this check box to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a
UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without
entering the Device's IP address (although you must still enter the password
to access the web configurator).
Allow users to make
configuration changes through
UPnP
Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically
configure the Device so that they can communicate through the Device, for
example by using NAT traversal, UPnP applications automatically reserve a
NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled
device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for
the UPnP enabled application.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Table 75 Advanced > UPnP > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Reset
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
18.3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example
This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.
Installing UPnP in Windows Me
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me.
Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.
Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box.
Click Details.
Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
189
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the
Components selection box.
Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components
Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next.
Restart the computer when prompted.
Installing UPnP in Windows XP
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP.
190
Click Start and Control Panel.
Double-click Network Connections.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional
Networking Components ….
Network Connections
The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking
Service in the Components selection box and click Details.
Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
191
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box.
Networking Services
Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and
click Next.
18.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example
This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP
installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Device.
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Device. Turn on your computer and the
Device.
Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
192
Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under
Internet Gateway.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Right-click the icon and select Properties.
Network Connections
In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there
were automatically created.
Internet Connection Properties
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
193
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings.
Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings
Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add
194
When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be
deleted automatically.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in
the system tray.
System Tray Icon
Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.
Internet Connection Status
Web Configurator Easy Access
With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the Device without finding out the IP
address of the Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Device.
Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.
Click Start and then Control Panel.
Double-click Network Connections.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
195
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Select My Network Places under Other Places.
Network Connections
196
An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Right-click on the icon for your Device and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen
displays.
Network Connections: My Network Places
Right-click on the icon for your Device and select Properties. A properties window displays with
basic information about the Device.
Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
197
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
198
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
19
CWMP
19.1 Overview
The Device supports TR-069 Amendment 1 (CPE WAN Management Protocol Release 2.0) and TR069 Amendment 2 (CPE WAN Management Protocol v1.1, Release 3.0).
TR-069 is a protocol that defines how your Device (ZD) can be managed via a management server
(MS) such as ZyXEL’s Vantage Access.
Figure 109 LAN and WAN
ZD
MS
An administrator can use a management server to remotely set up the Device, modify settings,
perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the Device.
In order to use CWMP, you need to configure the following steps:
Activate CWMP
Specify the URL, username and password.
Activate periodic inform and specify an interval value.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
199
Chapter 19 CWMP
19.2 The CWMP Setup Screen
Use this screen to configure your Device to be managed by a management server. Click
Advanced> CWMP to display the following screen.
Figure 110 Advanced > CWMP
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 76 Advanced > CWMP
LINK
DESCRIPTION
CWMP Setup
CWMP
ACS Login
Information
200
Select Activated to allow the Device to be managed by a management server or select
Deactivated to not allow the Device to be managed by a management server.
Configure this part of the screen to log into the management server.
URL
Type the IP address or domain name of the management server. If the Device is behind a
NAT router that assigns it a private IP address, you will have to configure a NAT port
forwarding rule on the NAT router.
User Name
The user name is used to authenticate the Device when making a connection to the
management server. This user name on the management server and the Device must be
the same. Type a user name of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-language
keyboard. Spaces and characters such as @#$%^&*()_+ are allowed.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 19 CWMP
Table 76 Advanced > CWMP (continued)
LINK
Password
DESCRIPTION
The password is used to authenticate the Device when making a connection to the
management server. This password on the management server and the Device must be the
same. Type a password of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-language
keyboard.
Connection
Request
Information
Use this part of the screen to allow the management server to connect to the Device after a
successful login.
Path
Type the IP address or domain name of the Device. The management server uses this path
to verify the Device.
Port
The default port for access to the Device from the management server is port 7547. If you
change it, make sure it does not conflict with another port on your network and it is
recommended to use a port number above 1024 (not a commonly used port). The
management server should use this port to connect to the Device. You may need to alter
your NAT port forwarding rules if they were already configured.
UserName
The user name is used to authenticate the management server when connecting to the
Device. Type a user name of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-language
keyboard. Spaces and characters such as @#$%^&*()_+ are allowed.
Password
The password is used to authenticate the management server when connecting to the
Device. Type a password of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-language
keyboard. Spaces are not allowed.
Periodic Inform
Config
Periodic
Inform
Select Activated to have the Device periodically send information to the management
server (recommended if CWMP is enabled) or select Deactivated to not have the Device
periodically send information to the management server
Interval
The interval is the duration in seconds for which the Device must attempt to connect with
the management server to send information and check for configuration updates. Enter a
value between 1 and 86400 seconds.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
201
Chapter 19 CWMP
202
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
20
System Settings
20.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password,
name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval.
20.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens
• Use he
t General screen (Section 20.2 on page 203) to configure system settings.
• Use he
t Time and Date screen (Section 20.3 on page 204) to set the system time.
20.2 The General Screen
Use this screen to configure system admin password.
Click Maintenance > System to open the General screen.
Figure 111 Maintenance > System > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 77 Maintenance > System > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Password
Admin Password
Old Password
Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this
field.
New Password
Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password,
the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use
the new password to access the Device.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
203
Chapter 20 System Settings
Table 77 Maintenance > System > General
LABEL
Retype to
confirm
DESCRIPTION
Type the new password again for confirmation.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
20.3 The Time and Date Screen
Use this screen to configure the Device’s time based on your local time zone. To change your
Device’s time and date, click Maintenance > System > Time and Date. The screen appears as
shown.
Figure 112 Maintenance > System > Time and Date
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 78 Maintenance > System > Time and Date
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Current Time and Date
Current Time
This field displays the time of your Device.
Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the time with the time server.
Current Date
This field displays the date of your Device.
Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the date with the time server.
Time and Date Setup
204
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 20 System Settings
Table 78 Maintenance > System > Time and Date (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Manual
Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new
time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date
you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect
it.
New Time
This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured
manually.
(hh:mm:ss)
New Date
(yyyy/mm/dd)
When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and
then click Apply.
This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured
manually.
When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and
then click Apply.
Get from Time
Server
Select this radio button to have the Device get the time and date from the time server
you specified below.
Time Server
Address
Enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time
server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Time Zone Setup
Time Zone
Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your
time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Daylight Savings
Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their
clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the
evening.
Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable
Daylight Saving. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of
March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M.
local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type
2 in the o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of
the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same
moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last,
Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In
Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour
ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End Date
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable
Daylight Saving. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each
time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So
in the United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the
o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of
the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same
moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last,
Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone.
In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour
ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
205
Chapter 20 System Settings
206
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
21
Logs
21.1 Overview
This chapter contains information about viewing the Device’s logs.
The web configurator allows you to choose which types of events and/or alerts to have the Device
log and then display the logs.
21.1.1 What You Need To Know About Logs
Alerts
An alert is a message that is enabled as soon as the event occurs. They include system errors,
attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as
System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the
View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.
Logs
A log is a message about an event that occurred on your Device. For example, when someone logs
in to the Device, you can set a schedule for how often logs should be enabled, or sent to a syslog
server.
21.2 The System Log Screen
Use the System Log screen to configure and view the logs you wish to display.
To change your Device’s log settings, click Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings. The screen
appears as shown.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
207
Chapter 21 Logs
Alerts are e-mailed as soon as they happen. Logs may be e-mailed as soon as the log is full.
Selecting many alert and/or log categories (especially Access Control) may result in many e-mails
being sent.
Figure 113 Maintenance > System Logs
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 79 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
System Log
Log Type
Select the types of logs that you want to display and record. Then click Submit to display
the details.
Clear Log
Click this to delete all the logs.
Save Log
Click this to save the logs in a text file.
Remote System Log
208
Active
Select to enable or disable remote system logging.
Remote Host
Specify the address of the remote host to send logs to.
Save
Click this to save your changes.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Logs
21.3 Log Descriptions
This section provides descriptions of example log messages.
Table 80 System Maintenance Logs
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
Time calibration is successful
The router has adjusted its time based on information from the
time server.
Time calibration failed
The router failed to get information from the time server.
WAN interface gets IP: %s
A WAN interface got a new IP address from the DHCP, PPPoE, or
dial-up server.
DHCP client IP expired
A DHCP client's IP address has expired.
DHCP server assigns %s
The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client.
Successful WEB login
Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator
interface.
WEB login failed
Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator
interface.
Successful TELNET login
Someone has logged on to the router via telnet.
TELNET login failed
Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet.
Successful FTP login
Someone has logged on to the router via ftp.
FTP login failed
Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp.
NAT Session Table is Full!
The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been
exceeded and the table is full.
Starting Connectivity Monitor
Starting Connectivity Monitor.
Time initialized by Daytime
Server
The router got the time and date from the Daytime server.
Time initialized by Time server The router got the time and date from the time server.
Time initialized by NTP server
The router got the time and date from the NTP server.
Connect to Daytime server fail
The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server.
Connect to Time server fail
The router was not able to connect to the Time server.
Connect to NTP server fail
The router was not able to connect to the NTP server.
Too large ICMP packet has been
dropped
The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large.
Configuration Change: PC =
0x%x, Task ID = 0x%x
The router is saving configuration changes.
Successful SSH login
Someone has logged on to the router’s SSH server.
SSH login failed
Someone has failed to log on to the router’s SSH server.
Successful HTTPS login
Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface
using HTTPS protocol.
HTTPS login failed
Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator
interface using HTTPS protocol.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
209
Chapter 21 Logs
Table 81 System Error Logs
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
%s exceeds the max. number
of session per host!
This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum number of
NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host.
setNetBIOSFilter: calloc
error
The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings.
readNetBIOSFilter: calloc
error
The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings.
WAN connection is down.
A WAN connection is down. You can access the network through this
interface.
Table 82 Access Control Logs
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
Firewall default policy: [ TCP |
UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access matched
the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to
the default policy’s setting.
Firewall rule [] match:[ TCP | UDP
| IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF ] , 
Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access matched
(or did not match) a configured firewall rule (deed by its
number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule.
Triangle route packet forwarded: [
TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF
The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through.
Packet without a NAT table entry
blocked: [ TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP |
GRE | OSPF ]
The router blocked a packet that didn't have a corresponding
NAT table entry.
Router sent blocked web site
message: TCP
The router sent a message to notify a user that the router
blocked access to a web site that the user requested.
Table 83 TCP Reset Logs
210
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
Under SYN flood attack,
sent TCP RST
The router sent a TCP reset packet when a host was under a SYN flood
attack (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.)
Exceed TCP MAX incomplete,
sent TCP RST
The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of TCP
incomplete connections exceeded the user configured threshold. (the
TCP incomplete count is per destination host.) e: Refer to TCP
Maximum Incomplete in the Firewall Attack Alerts screen.
Peer TCP state out of order,
sent TCP RST
The router sent a TCP reset packet when a TCP connection state was
out of order.e: The firewall refers to RFC793 Figure 6 to check the TCP
state.
Firewall session time out,
sent TCP RST
The router sent a TCP reset packet when a dynamic firewall session
timed out.Default timeout values:ICMP idle timeout (s): 60UDP idle
timeout (s): 60TCP connection (three way handshaking) timeout (s):
30TCP FIN-wait timeout (s): 60TCP idle (established) timeout (s):
3600
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Logs
Table 83 TCP Reset Logs (continued)
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
Exceed MAX incomplete, sent
TCP RST
The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of incomplete
connections (TCP and UDP) exceeded the user-configured threshold.
(Incomplete count is for all TCP and UDP connections through the
firewall.)e: When the number of incomplete connections (TCP + UDP)
> “Maximum Incomplete High”, the router sends TCP RST packets for
TCP connections and destroys TOS (firewall dynamic sessions) until
incomplete connections < “Maximum Incomplete Low”.
Access block, sent TCP RST
The router sends a TCP RST packet and generates this log if you turn
on the firewall TCP reset mechanism (via CI command: "sys firewall
tcprst").
Table 84 Packet Filter Logs
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
[ TCP | UDP | ICMP | IGMP |
Generic ] packet filter matched
(set: %d, rule: %d)
Attempted access matched a configured filter rule (deed by its set
and rule number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the
rule.
For type and code details, see Table 93 on page 214.
Table 85 ICMP Logs
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
Firewall default policy: ICMP
, ,

ICMP access matched the default policy and was blocked or
forwarded according to the user's setting.
Firewall rule [] match: ICMP
, ,
, 
ICMP access matched (or didn’t match) a firewall rule (deed
by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to
the rule.
Triangle route packet forwarded:
ICMP
The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through.
Packet without a NAT table entry
blocked: ICMP
The router blocked a packet that didn’t have a corresponding
NAT table entry.
Unsupported/out-of-order ICMP:
ICMP
The firewall does not support this kind of ICMP packets or the
ICMP packets are out of order.
Router reply ICMP packet: ICMP
The router sent an ICMP reply packet to the sender.
Table 86 CDR Logs
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
board %d line %d channel %d,
call %d, %s C01 Outgoing Call
dev=%x ch=%x %s
The router received the setup requirements for a call. “call” is the
reference (count) number of the call. “dev” is the device type (3 is
for dial-up, 6 is for PPPoE, 10 is for PPTP) "channel" or “ch” is the
call channel ID. For example,"board 0 line 0 channel 0, call 3, C01
Outgoing Call dev=6 ch=0 "Means the router has dialed to the
PPPoE server 3 times.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
211
Chapter 21 Logs
Table 86 CDR Logs (continued)
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
board %d line %d channel %d,
call %d, %s C02 OutCall
Connected %d %s
The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call is connected.
The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call was disconnected.
board %d line %d channel %d,
call %d, %s C02 Call Terminated
Table 87 PPP Logs
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
ppp:LCP Starting
The PPP connection’s Link Control Protocol stage has started.
ppp:LCP Opening
The PPP connection’s Link Control Protocol stage is opening.
ppp:CHAP Opening
The PPP connection’s Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is
opening.
ppp:IPCP Starting
The PPP connection’s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is starting.
ppp:IPCP Opening
The PPP connection’s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is opening.
ppp:LCP Closing
The PPP connection’s Link Control Protocol stage is closing.
ppp:IPCP Closing
The PPP connection’s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is closing.
Table 88 UPnP Logs
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
UPnP pass through Firewall
UPnP packets can pass through the firewall.
Table 89 Content Filtering Logs
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
%s: block keyword
The content of a requested web page matched a user defined keyword.
%s
The system forwarded web content.
For type and code details, see Table 93 on page 214.
Table 90 Attack Logs
212
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
attack [ TCP | UDP | IGMP |
ESP | GRE | OSPF ]
The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF attack.
attack ICMP (type:%d,
code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP attack.
land [ TCP | UDP | IGMP |
ESP | GRE | OSPF ]
The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF land attack.
land ICMP (type:%d,
code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP land attack.
ip spoofing - WAN [ TCP |
UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE |
OSPF ]
The firewall detected an IP spoofing attack on the WAN port.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Logs
Table 90 Attack Logs (continued)
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
ip spoofing - WAN ICMP
(type:%d, code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack on the WAN port.
icmp echo : ICMP (type:%d,
code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP echo attack.
syn flood TCP
The firewall detected a TCP syn flood attack.
ports scan TCP
The firewall detected a TCP port scan attack.
teardrop TCP
The firewall detected a TCP teardrop attack.
teardrop UDP
The firewall detected an UDP teardrop attack.
teardrop ICMP (type:%d,
code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP teardrop attack.
illegal command TCP
The firewall detected a TCP illegal command attack.
NetBIOS TCP
The firewall detected a TCP NetBIOS attack.
ip spoofing - no routing
entry [ TCP | UDP | IGMP |
ESP | GRE | OSPF ]
The firewall classified a packet with no source routing entry as an IP
spoofing attack.
ip spoofing - no routing
entry ICMP (type:%d,
code:%d)
The firewall classified an ICMP packet with no source routing entry as
an IP spoofing attack.
vulnerability ICMP
(type:%d, code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP vulnerability attack.
traceroute ICMP (type:%d,
code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP traceroute attack.
Table 91 802.1X Logs
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
RADIUS accepts user.
A user was authenticated by the RADIUS Server.
RADIUS rejects user. Pls check
RADIUS Server.
A user was not authenticated by the RADIUS Server. Please
check the RADIUS Server.
User logout because of session
timeout expired.
The router logged out a user whose session expired.
User logout because of user
deassociation.
The router logged out a user who ended the session.
User logout because of no
authentication response from user.
The router logged out a user from which there was no
authentication response.
User logout because of idle timeout
expired.
The router logged out a user whose idle timeout period
expired.
User logout because of user
request.
A user logged out.
No response from RADIUS. Pls check
RADIUS Server.
There is no response message from the RADIUS server,
please check the RADIUS server.
Use RADIUS to authenticate user.
The RADIUS server is operating as the authentication server.
No Server to authenticate user.
There is no authentication server to authenticate a user.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
213
Chapter 21 Logs
Table 92 ACL Setting Notes
PACKET DIRECTION
DIRECTION
DESCRIPTION
(L to W)
LAN to WAN
ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the WAN.
(W to L)
WAN to LAN
ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the LAN.
(L to L/Device)
LAN to LAN/
Device
ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the LAN or
the Device.
(W to W/Device)
WAN to WAN/
Device
ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the WAN
or the Device.
Table 93 ICMP Notes
TYPE
CODE
Echo Reply
Echo reply message
Destination Unreachable
Net unreachable
Host unreachable
Protocol unreachable
Port unreachable
A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don't
Fragment (DF)
Source route failed
Source Quench
A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space
needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to
the destination network.
Redirect
Redirect datagrams for the Network
Redirect datagrams for the Host
Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Network
Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Host
Echo
Echo message
Time Exceeded
11
Time to live exceeded in transit
Fragment reassembly time exceeded
Parameter Problem
12
Pointer indicates the error
Timestamp
13
Timestamp request message
Timestamp Reply
14
214
DESCRIPTION
Timestamp reply message
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Logs
Table 93 ICMP Notes (continued)
TYPE
CODE
DESCRIPTION
Information Request
15
Information request message
Information Reply
16
Information reply message
Table 94 Syslog Logs
LOG MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
Mon dd
hr:mm:ss hostname
src=""
dst=""
msg="" e=""
devID="" cat="
"This message is sent by the system ("RAS" displays as
the system name if you haven’t configured one) when the
router generates a syslog. The facility is defined in the
web MAIN MENU->LOGS->Log Settings page. The
severity is the log’s syslog class. The definition of
messages and notes are defined in the various log charts
throughout this appendix. The “devID” is the last three
characters of the MAC address of the router’s LAN port.
The “cat” is the same as the category in the router’s logs.
The following table shows RFC-2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays. Please refer to
RFC 2408 for detailed information on each type.
Table 95 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types
LOG DISPLAY
PAYLOAD TYPE
SA
Security Association
PROP
Proposal
TRANS
Transform
KE
Key Exchange
ID
Identification
CER
Certificate
CER_REQ
Certificate Request
HASH
Hash
SIG
Signature
NONCE
Nonce
FY
notification
DEL
Delete
VID
Vendor ID
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
215
Chapter 21 Logs
216
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
22
Tools
22.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to upload new firmware, manage configuration files and restart your
Device.
Use the instructions in this chapter to change the device’s configuration file or upgrade its firmware.
After you configure your device, you can backup the configuration file to a computer. That way if
you later misconfigure the device, you can upload the backed up configuration file to return to your
previous settings. You can alternately upload the factory default configuration file if you want to
return the device to the original default settings. The firmware determines the device’s available
features and functionality. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP
site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your device’s performance.
Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your Device.
22.1.1 What You Can Do in the Tool Screens
• Use he
t Firmware Upgrade screen (Section 22.2 on page 217) to upload firmware to your
device.
• Use he
t Configuration screen (Section 22.3 on page 219) to backup and restore device
configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default.
• Use he
t Restart screen (Section 22.4 on page 221) to restart your Device.
22.2 The Firmware Screen
Click Maintenance > Tools to open the Firmware screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to
upload firmware to your Device. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and
may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
217
Chapter 22 Tools
Do not turn off the Device while firmware upload is in progress!
Figure 114 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 96 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Current
Firmware
Version
This is the present Firmware version and the date created.
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ...
to find it.
Browse...
Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must
decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
After you see the Firmware Upload in Progress screen, wait two minutes before logging into the
Device again.
Figure 115 Firmware Upload In Progress
218
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Tools
The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some
operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 116 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the
Firmware screen.
Figure 117 Error Message
22.3 The Configuration Screen
Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup
configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next.
Figure 118 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
219
Chapter 22 Tools
Backup Configuration
Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the Device’s current configuration to a file on
your computer. Once your Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended
that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup
configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Click Backup to save the Device’s current configuration to your computer.
Restore Configuration
Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your
computer to your Device.
Table 97 Restore Configuration
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to
find it.
Browse...
Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click this to begin the upload process.
Do not turn off the Device while configuration file upload is in progress.
After you see a “restore configuration successful” screen, you must then wait one minute before
logging into the Device again.
Figure 119 Configuration Upload Successful
The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some
operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 120 Network Temporarily Disconnected
220
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Tools
If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your
computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See
Appendix A on page 231 for details on how to set up your computer’s IP address.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the
Configuration screen.
Figure 121 Configuration Upload Error
Reset to Factory Defaults
Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the Device to
its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears.
Figure 122 Reset Warning Message
Figure 123 Reset In Process Message
You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your Device.
Refer to Section 1.7 on page 19 for more information on the RESET button.
22.4 The Restart Screen
System restart allows you to reboot the Device remotely without turning the power off. You may
need to do this if the Device hangs, for example.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
221
Chapter 22 Tools
Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the Device reboot. This does not
affect the Device's configuration.
Figure 124 Maintenance > Tools >Restart
222
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
23
Diagnostic
23.1 Overview
These read-only screens display information to help you identify problems with the Device.
23.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens
• Use he
t General screen (Section 23.2 on page 223) to ping an IP address.
• Use he
t DSL Line screen (Section 23.3 on page 224) to view the DSL line statistics and reset the
ADSL line.
23.2 The General Screen
Use this screen to ping an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic to open the screen shown
next.
Figure 125 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
223
Chapter 23 Diagnostic
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 98 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
TCP/IP
Address
Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a
connection.
Ping
Click this to ping the IP address that you entered.
23.3 The DSL Line Screen
Use this screen to view the DSL line statistics and reset the ADSL line. Click Maintenance >
Diagnostic > DSL Line to open the screen shown next.
Figure 126 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line
224
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 23 Diagnostic
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 99 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ATM Status
Click this to view your DSL connection’s Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)
statistics. ATM is a networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer.
ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS
(Quality of Service) can be guaranteed.
The (Segmentation and Reassembly) SAR driver translates packets into ATM cells.
It also receives ATM cells and reassembles them into packets.
These counters are set back to zero whenever the device starts up.
inPkts is the number of good ATM cells that have been received.
inDiscards is the number of received ATM cells that were rejected.
outPkts is the number of ATM cells that have been sent.
outDiscards is the number of ATM cells sent that were rejected.
inF4Pkts is the number of ATM Operations, Administration, and Management
(OAM) F4 cells that have been received. See ITU recommendation I.610 for more
on OAM for ATM.
outF4Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F4 cells that have been sent.
inF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been received.
outF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been sent.
openChan is the number of times that the Device has opened a logical DSL
channel.
closeChan is the number of times that the Device has closed a logical DSL
channel.
txRate is the number of bytes transmitted per second.
rxRate is the number of bytes received per second.
ATM Loopback
Test
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Click this to start the ATM loopback test. Make sure you have configured at least
one PVC with proper VPIs/VCIs before you begin this test. The Device sends an
OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM/ATM switch and then returns it (loops it back) to the
Device. The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the
DSLAM and ATM network.
225
Chapter 23 Diagnostic
Table 99 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DSL Line Status
Click this to view statistics about the DSL connections.
noise margin downstream is the signal to noise ratio for the downstream part
of the connection (coming into the Device from the ISP). It is measured in
decibels. The higher the number the more signal and less noise there is.
output power upstream is the amount of power (in decibels) that the Device is
using to transmit to the ISP.
attenuation downstream is the reduction in amplitude (in decibels) of the DSL
signal coming into the Device from the ISP.
Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT) modulation divides up a line’s bandwidth into subcarriers (sub-channels) of 4.3125 KHz each called tones. The rest of the display is
the line’s bit allocation. This is displayed as the number (in hexadecimal format) of
bits transmitted for each tone. This can be used to determine the quality of the
connection, whether a given sub-carrier loop has sufficient margins to support
certain ADSL transmission rates, and possibly to determine whether particular
specific types of interference or line attenuation exist. Refer to the ITU-T G.992.1
recommendation for more information on DMT.
The better (or shorter) the line, the higher the number of bits transmitted for a
DMT tone. The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is
15. There will be some tones without any bits as there has to be space between
the upstream and downstream channels.
Reset ADSL Line
Click this to reinitialize the ADSL line. The large text box above then displays the
progress and results of this operation, for example:
"Start to reset ADSL
Loading ADSL modem F/W...
Reset ADSL Line Successfully!"
Capture All Logs
226
Click this to display information and statistics about your Device’s ATM statistics,
DSL connection statistics, DHCP settings, firmware version, WAN and gateway IP
address, VPI/VCI and LAN IP address.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
C HAPTER
24
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
• Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
• Device Access and Login
• Internet Access
24.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
Make sure the Device is turned on.
Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Device.
Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Device and plugged in to an appropriate
power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
Turn the Device off and on.
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.6 on page 18.
Check the hardware connections.
Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
Turn the Device off and on.
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
227
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
24.2 Device Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the Device.
The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the Device by
looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows
computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default
Gateway might be the IP address of the Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP
address in your Internet browser.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.7 on page
19.
I forgot the password.
The default admin password is 1234.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.7 on page
19.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address (Section 7.2 on page 86), use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the Device.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide.
Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled. See Appendix C on page 259.
Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Device with the default IP address.
See Section 1.7 on page 19.
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
228
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
• Try to access the Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Device,
check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the Device does not
respond to HTTP.
• If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is
connected to a ETHERNET port.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Device.
Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default admin password is 1234. The field
is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Device. Log
out of the Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.
Turn the Device off and on.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 24.1 on page
227.
I cannot Telnet to the Device.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload
new firmware.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
24.3 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 18.
Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These fields are casesensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
229
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless
client are the same as the settings in the AP.
If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure you enabled the wireless LAN and
have selected the correct channel in the Wireless LAN > AP screen.
Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again.
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the Device), but my
Internet connection is not available anymore.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 18.
Turn the Device off and on.
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
The Internet connection is slow or intermittent.
There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.6 on page 18.
If the Device is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the
Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications.
Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving your computer closer to the
Device if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the
wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on).
Turn the Device off and on.
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try
one of the advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you
might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications.
230
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed.
Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions
of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your
computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package.
TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and
later operating systems.
After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to
"communicate" with your network.
If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your
computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Device’s LAN port.
Windows 95/98/Me
Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network
window.
Figure 127 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
231
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Installing Components
The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a
network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks.
If you need the adapter:
In the Network window, click Add.
Select Adapter and then click Add.
Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK.
If you need TCP/IP:
In the Network window, click Add.
Select Protocol and then click Add.
Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK.
If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:
Click Add.
Select Client and then click Add.
Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK.
Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect.
Configuring
In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click
Properties
Click the IP Address tab.
• If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically.
• If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into
the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields.
232
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 128 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address
Click the DNS Configuration tab.
• If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS.
• If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields
below (you may not need to fill them all in).
Figure 129 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration
Click the Gateway tab.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
233
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• If you do not know your gateway’s IP address, remove previously installed gateways.
• If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add.
Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window.
Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted.
Turn on your Device and restart your computer when prompted.
Verifying Settings
Click Start and then Run.
In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window.
Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default
gateway.
Windows 2000/NT/XP
The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme.
Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel.
Figure 130 Windows XP: Start Menu
234
In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up Connections
in Windows 2000/NT).
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 131 Windows XP: Control Panel
Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.
Figure 132 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties
Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
235
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 133 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties
The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP).
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically.
• If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address,
Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.
• Click Advanced.
Figure 134 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
236
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP
Settings tab and click OK.
Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
• In he
t IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.
• In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask,
and then click Add.
• Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.
• Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default
gateways.
• In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To
manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic
metric check box and type a metric in Metric.
• Click Add.
• Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.
• Click OK when finished.
Figure 135 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties
In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):
• Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP
address(es).
• If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server
addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields.
If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order
them.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
237
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 136 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
10
Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows
2000/NT).
11 Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.
In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open
Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support
tab.
Windows Vista
This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6.0.
238
Click the Start icon, Control Panel.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 137 Windows Vista: Start Menu
In the Control Panel, double-click Network and Internet.
Figure 138 Windows Vista: Control Panel
Click Network and Sharing Center.
Figure 139 Windows Vista: Network And Internet
Click Manage network connections.
Figure 140 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
239
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.
Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying
that it needs your permission to continue.
Figure 141 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties.
Figure 142 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens (the General tab).
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically.
240
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP address and fill in the IP address,
Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.
• Click Advanced.
Figure 143 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP
Settings tab and click OK.
Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
• In he
t IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.
• In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask,
and then click Add.
• Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.
• Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default
gateways.
• In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To
manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic
metric check box and type a metric in Metric.
• Click Add.
• Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.
• Click OK when finished.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
241
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 144 Windows Vista: Advanced TCP/IP Properties
In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window, (the General tab):
• Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP
address(es).
• If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server
addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields.
If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order
them.
242
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 145 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
10 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window.
11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
12
Close the Network Connections window.
13 Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.
In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open
Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support
tab.
Macintosh OS 8/9
Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP Control
Panel.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
243
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 146 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu
Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list.
Figure 147 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP
244
For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list.
For statically assigned settings, do the following:
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• From he
t Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your Device in the Router address box.
Close the TCP/IP Control Panel.
Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration.
Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window.
Macintosh OS X
Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window.
Figure 148 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu
Click Network in the icon bar.
• Select Automatic from the Location list.
• Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list.
• Click the TCP/IP tab.
For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
245
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 149 Macintosh OS X: Network
For statically assigned settings, do the following:
• From he
t Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your Device in the Router address box.
Click Apply Now and close the window.
Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window.
Linux
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0.
Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release
version.
Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
246
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE)
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE.
Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click
Network.
Figure 150 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices
Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device
General screen displays as shown.
Figure 151 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General
• If you have a dynamic IP address, click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and
select dhcp from the drop down list.
• If you have a static IP address, click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address,
Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields.
Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
247
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration
screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided.
Figure 152 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS
Click the Devices tab.
Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save
the changes in all screens.
Figure 153 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate
After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network
Configuration screen.
Using Configuration Files
Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address.
Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-eth0
configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with
any plain text editor.
• If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure
shows an example.
248
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 154 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=dhcp
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
• If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed
by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet
mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10
and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Figure 155 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=192.168.1.10
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf
file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP
addresses are specified.
Figure 156 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf
nameserver 172.23.5.1
nameserver 172.23.5.2
After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter ./network
restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example.
Figure 157 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card
[root@localhost init.d]# network restart
Shutting down interface eth0:
Shutting down loopback interface:
Setting network parameters:
Bringing up loopback interface:
Bringing up interface eth0:
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
Verifying Settings
Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
249
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 158 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties
[root@localhost]# ifconfig
eth0
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44
inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb)
Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000
[root@localhost]#
250
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks.
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use
subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
Introduction to IP Addresses
One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same
way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common
network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has
its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets
to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are
delivered.
Structure
An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example,
192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary
number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation).
Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in
decimal.
The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1) are
the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
251
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Figure 159 Network Number and Host ID
How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according
to the subnet mask.
Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are
part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term “subnet” is short for “sub-network”.
A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the IP
address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit
in the IP address is part of the host ID.
The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host
ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal).
Table 100 Subnet Masks
1ST OCTET: 2ND
OCTET:
(192)
(168)
3RD
OCTET:
4TH OCTET
(1)
(2)
IP Address (Binary)
11000000
10101000
00000001
00000010
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
Network Number
11000000
10101000
00000001
Host ID
00000010
By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the
leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.
Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a “1” value).
For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24
bits are zeroes.
252
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following
examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks.
Table 101 Subnet Masks
BINARY
DECIMAL
1ST
OCTET
2ND
OCTET
3RD
OCTET
4TH OCTET
8-bit mask
11111111
00000000
00000000
00000000
255.0.0.0
16-bit mask
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
255.255.0.0
24-bit mask
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
255.255.255.0
29-bit mask
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111000
255.255.255.248
Network Size
The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have
on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of
remaining host ID bits.
An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit
subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that
network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example).
As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of
possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 102 Maximum Host Numbers
SUBNET MASK
8 bits
HOST ID SIZE
255.0.0.0
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS
24 bits
224
–2
16
–2
16777214
65534
16 bits
255.255.0.0
16 bits
24 bits
255.255.255.0
8 bits
28 – 2
254
29 bits
255.255.255.24
3 bits
23 – 2
Notation
Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a
continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the
number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/”
followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128.
The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.
Table 103 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.0
/24
0000 0000
255.255.255.128
/25
1000 0000
128
255.255.255.192
/26
1100 0000
192
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
253
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 103 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation (continued)
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.224
/27
1110 0000
224
255.255.255.240
/28
1111 0000
240
255.255.255.248
/29
1111 1000
248
255.255.255.252
/30
1111 1100
252
Subnetting
You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example
a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the
company network for security reasons.
In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum
of 28 – 2 or 254 possible hosts.
The following figure shows the company network before subnetting.
Figure 160 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting
You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate subnetworks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25).
The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25
and 192.168.1.128 /25.
The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two subnetworks, A and B.
254
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Figure 161 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting
In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 – 2 or 126
possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet’s address itself, all ones is the subnet’s
broadcast address).
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask
255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to
an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126.
Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two
subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to “borrow” two host ID
bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192.
Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all
zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
Table 104 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address (Decimal)
192.168.1.
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
00000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
255
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 105 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
64
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
01000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
Table 106 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
128
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
10000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190
Table 107 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
192
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
Example: Eight Subnets
Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111).
The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet.
Table 108 Eight Subnets
256
SUBNET
SUBNET
ADDRESS
FIRST ADDRESS
LAST
ADDRESS
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
30
31
32
33
62
63
64
65
94
95
96
97
126
127
128
129
158
159
160
161
190
191
192
193
222
223
224
225
254
255
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Subnet Planning
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number.
Table 109 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
255.255.255.128 (/25)
126
255.255.255.192 (/26)
62
255.255.255.224 (/27)
30
255.255.255.240 (/28)
16
14
255.255.255.248 (/29)
32
255.255.255.252 (/30)
64
255.255.255.254 (/31)
128
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number.
Table 110 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
255.255.128.0 (/17)
32766
255.255.192.0 (/18)
16382
255.255.224.0 (/19)
8190
255.255.240.0 (/20)
16
4094
255.255.248.0 (/21)
32
2046
255.255.252.0 (/22)
64
1022
255.255.254.0 (/23)
128
510
255.255.255.0 (/24)
256
254
255.255.255.128 (/25)
512
126
10
255.255.255.192 (/26)
1024
62
11
255.255.255.224 (/27)
2048
30
12
255.255.255.240 (/28)
4096
14
13
255.255.255.248 (/29)
8192
14
255.255.255.252 (/30)
16384
15
255.255.255.254 (/31)
32768
Configuring IP Addresses
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your
network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in
selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user
account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this
is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses
specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You
must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Device.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
257
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your Device that is easy to
remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using
that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Device will compute
the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change
the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the
Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to
the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has
reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0
• 172.16.0.0
— 10.255.255.255
— 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP
can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are
part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the
appropriate IP addresses.
Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the
guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address
Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.
258
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java
Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer
versions may vary.
Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow
pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address.
Disable Pop-up Blockers
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker.
Figure 162 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab.
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.
Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any
web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
259
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Figure 163 Internet Options: Privacy
Click Apply to save this setting.
Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps.
260
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Figure 164 Internet Options: Privacy
Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the
prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.167.1.
Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.
Figure 165 Pop-up Blocker Settings
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
261
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
Click Apply to save this setting.
JavaScripts
If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts
are allowed.
In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Figure 166 Internet Options: Security
262
Click the Custom Level... button.
Scroll down to Scripting.
Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
Click OK to close the window.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Figure 167 Security Settings - Java Scripting
Java Permissions
From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Click the Custom Level... button.
Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
Click OK to close the window.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
263
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Figure 168 Security Settings - Java
JAVA (Sun)
From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab.
Make sure that Use Java 2 for  under Java (Sun) is selected.
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 169 Java (Sun)
264
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Mozilla Firefox
Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary.
You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the
screen that appears.
Figure 170 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options
Click Content to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen.
Figure 171 Mozilla Firefox Content Security
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
265
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
266
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Wireless LANs
Wireless LAN Topologies
This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration
The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of
computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within
range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an
ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example
of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 172 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network
BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a
wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless
client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is
disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with
each other.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
267
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Figure 173 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access
point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection
between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).
This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only
provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the
immediate neighborhood.
An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated
wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate.
268
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Figure 174 Infrastructure WLAN
Channel
A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data.
Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your
region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce
interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing
interference and degrading performance.
Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should
be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For
example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to
select a channel between 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not
within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are
within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they
cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore,
they are considered hidden from each other.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
269
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Figure 175
RTS/CTS
When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the
channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of
data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.
RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest
size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is
invoked.
When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station
that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for
permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other
stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms
with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.
Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and
the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the
RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be
fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could
negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes)
that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data
frames.
A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while
you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference.
If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you
set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames
will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
270
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Preamble Type
Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of
the synchronization field in a packet.
Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending
data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short
preamble.
Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network
support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks.
Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide
more efficient communications.
Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the
network support it, otherwise the Device uses long preamble.
Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.
IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b
adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or
lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the
maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Table 111 IEEE 802.11g
DATA RATE (MBPS)
MODULATION
DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
5.5 / 11
CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
6/9/12/18/24/36/48/
54
OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
Wireless Security Overview
Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless
clients, access points and the wired network.
Wireless security methods available on the Device are data encryption, wireless client
authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the Device identity.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
271
Appendix D Wireless LANs
The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on
your Device.
Table 112 Wireless Security Levels
SECURITY
LEVEL
Least
Secure
SECURITY TYPE
Unique SSID (Default)
Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled
MAC Address Filtering
WEP Encryption
IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
WPA2
Most Secure
Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the Device and on all
wireless clients that you want to associate with it.
IEEE 802.1x
In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to
support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It
is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x
are:
• User based identification that allows for roaming.
• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for
centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server.
• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional
authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless
clients.
RADIUS
RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and
accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server
handles the following tasks:
• Authentication
Determines the identity of the users.
• Authorization
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the
network.
• Accounting
Keeps track of the client’s network activity.
272
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the
wireless client and the network RADIUS server.
Types of RADIUS Messages
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user authentication:
• Access-Request
Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
• Access-Reject
Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.
• Access-Challenge
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point
sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message.
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user accounting:
• Accounting-Request
Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
• Accounting-Response
Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.
In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret
key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the
shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from
unauthorized access.
Types of EAP Authentication
This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and
LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types.
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE
802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP
to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a
RADIUS server perform authentication.
The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that
supports IEEE 802.1x.
For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain
the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used
to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
273
Appendix D Wireless LANs
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)
MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server
sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client ‘proves’ that it knows the password by
encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in
plain text.
However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get
the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the
authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an
authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication.
Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support dataencryption with dynamic session key. You
must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for
mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of
the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done
in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive
attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity.
However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which
imposes a management overhead.
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)
EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the serverside authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending
username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client
authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP,
CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.
PEAP (Protected EAP)
Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then
use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the
clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5,
EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is
implemented only by Cisco.
LEAP
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the
wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is
generated each time reauthentication is performed.
274
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless
security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while
dynamic WEP is enabled.
Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic
keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public
deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a
comparison of the features of authentication types.
Table 113 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types
EAP-MD5
EAP-TLS
EAP-TTLS
PEAP
LEAP
Mutual Authentication
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Certificate – Client
No
Yes
Optional
Optional
No
Certificate – Server
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Dynamic Key Exchange
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Credential Integrity
None
Strong
Strong
Strong
Moderate
Deployment Difficulty
Easy
Hard
Moderate
Moderate
Moderate
Client Identity Protection
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
WPA and WPA2
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a
wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management
than WPA.
Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user
authentication.
If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use
WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use
WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into
each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless
client will be granted access to a WLAN.
If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on
whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.
Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less
secure than WPA or WPA2.
Encryption
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity
Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but
offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter
mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP).
TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
275
Appendix D Wireless LANs
called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check
(MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying
mechanism.
WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is
never used twice.
The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key
hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption
keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless
clients. This all happens in the background automatically.
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets,
altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the
receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is
assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.
By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity
checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi
network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference
between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific
credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force
password-guessing attacks but it’s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent,
single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal
encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of
WEP)
User Authentication
WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate
wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange
messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a
network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and
pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless
devices.
Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication
with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not
need to go with the authentication process again.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an
AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it.
Wireless Client WPA Supplicants
A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless
client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch
for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client.
The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero
Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it.
276
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812),
and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server
looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system.
The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.
The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies
network access accordingly.
A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS
server and the client.
The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and
management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The
keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and
the wireless clients.
Figure 176 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
WPA(2)-PSK Application Example
A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.
First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must
consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and
symbols).
The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password
matches.
The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not
sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
277
Appendix D Wireless LANs
The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information
exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data
exchanged between them.
Figure 177 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication
Security Parameters Summary
Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each
authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on
how you configure these security features.
Table 114 Wireless Security Relational Matrix
AUTHENTICATION
ENCRYPTIO
METHOD/ KEY
MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL N METHOD
ENTER
MANUAL KEY
IEEE 802.1X
Open
No
Disable
None
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Open
Shared
WEP
WEP
No
Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Disable
No
Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Disable
WPA
TKIP/AES
No
Enable
WPA-PSK
TKIP/AES
Yes
Disable
WPA2
TKIP/AES
No
Enable
WPA2-PSK
TKIP/AES
Yes
Disable
Antenna Overview
An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to
the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by
capturing RF signals from the air.
Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN.
278
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Antenna Characteristics
Frequency
An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz (IEEE 802.11a)
is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN
Radiation Pattern
A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna’s coverage
area.
Antenna Gain
Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width.
Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications.
For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately
2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of
approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment.
Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal
power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna
that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the
antenna provides.
Types of Antennas for WLAN
There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications.
• Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The
coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room
environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage
areas with multiple access points.
• Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light
from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles
typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional
antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications.
Positioning Antennas
In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In
point-to–point application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to
each other to attain the best performance.
For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For
omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP
application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible.
For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
279
Appendix D Wireless LANs
280
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
IPv6
Overview
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP
addresses.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can
be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
Link-local Address
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a
“private IP address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a
device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast
address format is as follows.
Table 115 Link-local Unicast Address Format
1111 1110 10
Interface ID
10 bits
54 bits
64 bits
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
281
Appendix E IPv6
Global Address
A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a “public IP address” in
IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3.
Unspecified Address
An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does
not have its own address. It is similar to “0.0.0.0” in IPv4.
Loopback Address
A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to
“127.0.0.1” in IPv4.
Multicast Address
In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses.
Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts
in a multicast group.
Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a
predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast
addresses.
Table 116 Predefined Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1
All hosts on a local node.
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2
All routers on a local node.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1
All hosts on a local connected link.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2
All routers on a local connected link.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2
All routers on a local site.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3
All DHCP severs on a local site.
The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned
to a multicast group.
Table 117 Reserved Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
282
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix E IPv6
Table 117 Reserved Multicast Address (continued)
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided
into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each
character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal
characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
Interface ID
In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an
Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One
interface should have a unique interface ID.
EUI-64
The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and
fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC
address. See the following example.
00
: 13
: 49
: 12
: 34
: 56
: 13
: 49
: FF
: FE
: 12
: 34
MAC
EUI-64
02
: 56
Stateless Autoconfiguration
With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated.
Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful
autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses don’t need to be maintained by a DHCP
server. Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when
IPv6 is initiated on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own
Ethernet MAC address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address.
When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address
(beginning with fe80).
When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the Device is set to automatically
obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 3another address which
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
283
Appendix E IPv6
combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router. This is a
routable global IP address.
DHCPv6
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol
that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other
configuration information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages
using UDP.
Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for
identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC
address, time, vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with
the IANA. It should not change over time even after you reboot the device.
Identity Association
An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which
the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with
exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration
from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP
information.
The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an
identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary
addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The
DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to
extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client
sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If
the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any
available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's
discretion.
T2
T1
Renew Renew
to S1
to S1
Renew Renew
to S1
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Rebind
to S2
Rebind
to S2
DHCP Relay Agent
A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages
between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a wellknown multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent
to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID
option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string,
3.
284
In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix E IPv6
such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the
VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply
messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the
interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to
the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Prefix Delegation
Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the
ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The Device uses the received IPv6 prefix (for
example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements
(RAs) regularly by multicast, the Device passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The
hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses.
ICMPv6
Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443.
ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify
ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors
encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping".
Multicast Listener Discovery
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's
Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather
than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3.
MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive
multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.
MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4.
MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.
MLD Messages
A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast
forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report
message for that address.
An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave
a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then
sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if
other devices connected to this port should remain in the group.
Transition Techniques
IPv6 Over IPv4 Tunnelling
To route traffic between two IPv6 networks over an IPv4 network, an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel has to
be used.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
285
Appendix E IPv6
On the Device, you can either set up a configured tunnel or an automatic 6to4 tunnel. The following
describes each method.
Configured Tunnel
A configured tunnel is a point-to-point tunnelling mechanism that encapsulates an IPv6 address
with an IPv4 address. Routers (A and B) on both IPv6 networks (1 and 2) each must have an
interface that connects to the IPv4 network (with an IPv4 address). This allows the router to send
and receive IPv6 data over the IPv4 network.
In this case, you must specify B’s public IPv4 address on A (similarly, specify A’s public IPv4
address on B) in order for packets to arrive at the intended destination through the IPv4 network.
Figure 178 Configured Tunnel Example
6to4 Tunnel
A 6to4 tunnel is an automatic tunnelling mechanism that provides connection between IPv6
networks across an IPv4 network. To transmit IPv6 packets over an IPv4 network, the IPv6 packets
are encapsulated inside IPv4 packets.
The following figure shows a network example.
Figure 179 6to4 Relay Router Network Example
In a 6to4 tunnel, 6to4 routers (A and B in the example network) forward these packets between
IPv6 networks (1 and 2) over the IPv4 Internet. A 6to4 relay router (C) connects to both an IPv6
and IPv4 network. A 6to4 relay router is used to forward packets between 6to4 routers in an IPv4
Internet and an IPv6 device (Z) on the IPv6 Internet.
To transmit packets, a 6to4 address is used with a special IPv6 prefix of 2002:: to encode a given
IPv4 address. A 6to4 address has the following format:
2002:IPv4 address:subnet ID:host ID/64
286
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix E IPv6
For example, if you have an IPv4 address of 192.168.1.1 (first converted to binary notation and then to
the colon hexadecimal representation of c0a8:0101), then the 6to4 addresses is 2002:c0a8:0101::1/
64.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista
By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the
ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the
ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses.
C:\>ipv6 install
Installing...
Succeeded.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific
IP Address. . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . .
IP Address. . . . .
Default Gateway . .
DNS
. .
. .
. .
. .
Suffix
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
10.1.1.46
255.255.255.0
fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4
10.1.1.254
IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check
your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available
for the interface on your computer.
Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP
Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment,
you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use
static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore
this section.)
This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:
Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer.
After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client
Install as service.
Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
287
Appendix E IPv6
Click Start and then OK.
Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7
Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7
computer.
To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:
288
Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection.
Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it.
Click OK to save the change.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix E IPv6
Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen.
Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global
address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS
IPv6 Address. . . . . .
Link-local IPv6 Address
IPv4 Address. . . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . . . .
Default Gateway . . . .
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Suffix
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
2001:b021:2d::1000
fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11
172.16.100.61
255.255.255.0
fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11
172.16.100.254
289
Appendix E IPv6
290
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port
numbers.
• Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a
different one, if you like.
• Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service
uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP
protocol number, not the port number.
• Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol.
• If he
t Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
• If he
t Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
• Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations
in which this service is used.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
291
Appendix F Services
Table 118 Examples of Services
NAME
292
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined
51
The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header)
tunneling protocol uses this service.
AIM
TCP
5190
AOL’s Internet Messenger service.
AUTH
TCP
113
Authentication protocol used by some
servers.
BGP
TCP
179
Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT
UDP
68
DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER
UDP
67
DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME
TCP/UDP
7648
TCP/UDP
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution from
White Pines Software.
DNS
TCP/UDP
53
Domain Name Server, a service that
matches web names (for instance
www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers.
ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL)
User-Defined
50
The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security
Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this
service.
FINGER
TCP
79
Finger is a UNIX or Internet related
command that can be used to find out if a
user is logged on.
FTP
TCP
20
TCP
21
File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable
fast transfer of files, including large files
that may not be possible by e-mail.
H.323
TCP
1720
NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP
TCP
80
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/
server protocol for the world wide web.
HTTPS
TCP
443
HTTPS is a secured http session often used
in e-commerce.
ICMP
User-Defined
Internet Control Message Protocol is often
used for diagnostic purposes.
ICQ
UDP
4000
This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST)
User-Defined
Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used
when sending packets to a specific group
of hosts.
IKE
UDP
500
The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is
used for key distribution and management.
IMAP4
TCP
143
The Internet Message Access Protocol is
used for e-mail.
IMAP4S
TCP
993
This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that
runs over SSL.
IRC
TCP/UDP
6667
This is another popular Internet chat
program.
MSN Messenger
TCP
1863
Microsoft Networks’ messenger service
uses this protocol.
NetBIOS
TCP/UDP
137
TCP/UDP
138
The Network Basic Input/Output System is
used for communication between
computers in a LAN.
TCP/UDP
139
TCP/UDP
445
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix F Services
Table 118 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
NEW-ICQ
TCP
5190
An Internet chat program.
NEWS
TCP
144
A protocol for news groups.
NFS
UDP
2049
Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that provides
transparent file sharing for network
environments.
NNTP
TCP
119
Network News Transport Protocol is the
delivery mechanism for the USENET
newsgroup service.
PING
User-Defined
Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that
sends out ICMP echo requests to test
whether or not a remote host is reachable.
POP3
TCP
110
Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client
computer get e-mail from a POP3 server
through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or
other).
POP3S
TCP
995
This is a more secure version of POP3 that
runs over SSL.
PPTP
TCP
1723
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables
secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined
47
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
enables secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the data channel.
RCMD
TCP
512
Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO
TCP
7070
A streaming audio service that enables real
time sound over the web.
REXEC
TCP
514
Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN
TCP
513
Remote Login.
ROADRUNNER
TCP/UDP
1026
This is an ISP that provides services mainly
for cable modems.
RTELNET
TCP
107
Remote Telnet.
RTSP
TCP/UDP
554
The Real Time Streaming (media control)
Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for
multimedia on the Internet.
SFTP
TCP
115
The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old
way of transferring files between
computers.
SMTP
TCP
25
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the
message-exchange standard for the
Internet. SMTP enables you to move
messages from one e-mail server to
another.
SMTPS
TCP
465
This is a more secure version of SMTP that
runs over SSL.
SNMP
TCP/UDP
161
Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS
TCP/UDP
162
Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
293
Appendix F Services
Table 118 Examples of Services (continued)
294
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
SQL-NET
TCP
1521
Structured Query Language is an interface
to access data on many different types of
database systems, including mainframes,
midrange systems, UNIX systems and
network servers.
SSDP
UDP
1900
The Simple Service Discovery Protocol
supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).
SSH
TCP/UDP
22
Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS
UDP
1558
Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG
UDP
514
Syslog allows you to send system logs to a
UNIX server.
TACACS
UDP
49
Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal
Access Controller Access Control System).
TELNET
TCP
23
Telnet is the login and terminal emulation
protocol common on the Internet and in
UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/
IP networks. Its primary function is to
allow users to log into remote host
systems.
VDOLIVE
TCP
7000
UDP
userdefined
A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port
number is specified in the application.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2012 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in
a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without
the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software
described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of
others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without
ice. This publication is subject to change without ice.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications,
Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and
may be properties of their respective owners.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operations.
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy, and if installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will occur
in a particular installation.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
295
Appendix G Legal Information
If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be
determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
• This transmitter must be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
• IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1
through 11.
• To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20
cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.
注意 !
依據
低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用
者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現
有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信規定作業之無線電信。低功率射頻電機須忍
受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
本機限在不干擾合法電臺與不受被干擾保障條件下於室內使用。
減少電磁波影響，請妥適使用。
Notices
Changes or modifications expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and
Switzerland, with restrictions in France.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
296
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com.
Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.
Select the certification you wish to view from this page.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in
materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the
warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to
faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective
products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall
deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any
replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or
higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall apply if the product
has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal
working conditions.
Notice
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of
merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for
indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return Material
Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that
the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with
an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer
will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the
corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you
may also have other rights that vary from country to country.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail ices of firmware upgrades and information at
www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
End-User License Agreement for "AMG1302-T10A"
WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY
UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION
PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM. IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU,
IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE
PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
297
Appendix G Legal Information
HOWEVER, CERTAIN ZYXEL'S PRODUCTS MAY CONTAIN-IN PART-SOME THIRD PARTY'S FREE AND
OPEN SOFTWARE PROGRAMS WHICH ALLOW YOU TO FREELY COPY, RUN, DISTRIBUTE, MODIFY
AND IMPROVE THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE TERMS OF SUCH THRID PARTY'S
LICENSES ("OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS"). THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS ARE LISTED IN
THE NOTICE OR APPENDIX BELOW. ZYXEL MAY HAVE DISTRIBUTED TO YOU HARDWARE AND/OR
SOFTWARE, OR MADE AVAILABLE FOR ELECTRONIC DOWNLOADS THESE FREE SOFTWARE
PROGRAMS OF THRID PARTIES AND YOU ARE LICENSED TO FREELY COPY, MODIFY AND
REDISTIBUTE THAT SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY.
NONE OF THE STATEMENTS OR DOCUMENTATION FROM ZYXEL INCLUDING ANY RESTRICTIONS OR
CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL RESTRICT ANY RIGHTS AND
LICENSES YOU MAY HAVE WITH RESPECT TO THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS UNDER THE
APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY.
1.Grant of License for Personal Use
ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-sublicense, nontransferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"),
including any documentation files accompanying the Software ("Documentation"), for internal
business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the
right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or
disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder. Any
rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are
disclaimed.
2.Ownership
You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software as
long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect. Ownership of the Software,
Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any
other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License
Agreement.
3.Copyright
The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by international copyright law,
trade secret law, international treaty provisions, and the applicable national laws of each respective
country. All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not
remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or
Documentation.
4.Restrictions
You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or create
derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense, convey or
otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted
hereunder with respect to the Software. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance,
technical or other support for the resultant modified Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer,
decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor
shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software. Except as and
only to the extent expressly permitted in this License, you may not market, co-brand, and private
label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software, or any part thereof. You may not use
the Software, or any part thereof, in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any
other person or entity. You may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the
298
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
foregoing. Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright
material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the
License Notice as below for the third party software, and your use of such material is exclusively
governed by their respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part of the Software package, access to
certain third party software as a convenience. To the extent that the Software contains third party
software, ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for
such software other than compliance with the applicable license terms of such third party, and
makes no warranty (express, implied or statutory) whatsoever with respect thereto. Please contact
the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer
service related to its software and products.
5.Confidentiality
You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby
agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you
use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You agree to
reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons
employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to
ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not
knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving
the source code of the Software.
6.No Warranty
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ZyXEL
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE
FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY
HAVE, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION,
OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE
SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION,
THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF
THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES
SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD.
7.Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE,
OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE OR PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH
RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE,
BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT'S PRICE. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
8.Export Restrictions
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
299
Appendix G Legal Information
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS,
REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR
INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU
SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE
AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR
OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES,
DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO
THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8.
9.Audit Rights
ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE, TO
PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
10.Termination
This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this License
Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and
Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License
Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of
the terms of this License Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or
return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all
known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions relating to
confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software
License Agreement.
11.General
This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of
China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any disputes
arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial
Arbitration Association sitting in ROC, Taiwan if the parties agree to a binding arbitration. This
License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto. This License
Agreement, the rights granted hereunder, the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned
by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License
Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of
this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the
remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of
the parties.
NOTE: Some components of this product incorporate free software programs covered under the
open source code licenses which allows you to freely copy, modify and redistribute the software. For
at least three (3) years from the date of distribution of the applicable product or software, we will
give to anyone who contacts us at the ZyXEL Technical Support (support@zyxel.com.tw), for a
charge of no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the complete corresponding source code for the version of the Programs
that we distributed to you if we are in possession of such.
300
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
Notice
Information herein is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in
examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part may be reproduced or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except the express written
permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
301
Appendix G Legal Information
This Product includes Linux Kernel, gcc, binutil, Ebtables , Busybox, Iptables, Boa, Bftpd, br2684ctl,
brctl, Ez-ipupdate, ntpclient, zebra, utelnetd, rp-pppoe, iwpriv, matrixssl, igmpproxy, mtd, inetd,
dnsmasq, ntfs-3g, tc, ecmh, and Dproxy-nexgen under below GPL license
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License
applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose
authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU
Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it,
that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you
can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or
to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of
such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you
have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each
author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want
its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by
others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger
that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for
everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
302
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The
"Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means
either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each
licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted,
and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends
on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in
any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this
License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of
this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a
copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is
derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it,
when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or
else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these
conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself
is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program
is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are
not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works
in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute
them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a
work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your
rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation
of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program)
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
303
Appendix G Legal Information
on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of
this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code
or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a
charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machinereadable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1
and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the
information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.(This alternative is
allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or
executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work
means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work,
complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special
exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in
either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place
counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so
long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based
on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the
recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance
by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from
the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
304
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free
redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution
of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended
to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the
wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through
any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make
thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or
by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that
distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing
version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version
or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify
a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted
by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make
exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED
IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
305
Appendix G Legal Information
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein, if any, are the property of their respective
owners.
This Product includes uClibc, libtam, and vconfig under the LGPL License.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the
successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use
it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the
ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the
explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it;
that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are
informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights
or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
306
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the
recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you
this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free
library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know
that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be
affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to
make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a
version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries,
and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain
libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The
ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its
criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other
code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's
freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers
Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we
use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides
advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use
of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must
be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as
widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a
particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of
free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables
many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux
operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure
that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to
run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library".
The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the
library in order to run.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
307
Appendix G Legal Information
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION
AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the
terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License").
Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently
linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a
library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of
the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted,
and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends
on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy
an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to
this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based
on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a
software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be
licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the
modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that
uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must
make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For
example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined
independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied
function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the
square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified
work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be
reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
308
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this
License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this
License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this
License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has
appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the
ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made
from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a
program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in
object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you
accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the
requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with
the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work,
in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this
License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a
derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses
the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for
distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header
file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library
even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not
precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure
layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length),
then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
(Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work
under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the
Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that
work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the
customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give
prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and
its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during
execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among
them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
309
Appendix G Legal Information
these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source
code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed
under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the
complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so
that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing
the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in
the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one
that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system,
rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a
modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interfacecompatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written
offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a,
above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the
work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy
the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a
copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the
required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs
needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be
distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the
executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary
libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you
cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single
library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a
combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of
the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a)
Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b)
Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the
Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have
their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on
it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the
Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the
recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance
by third parties with this License.
310
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from
the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free
redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution
of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended
to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the
wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through
any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make
thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or
by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that
distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing
version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version
or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software
which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the
free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of
software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN
WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
311
Appendix G Legal Information
LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
This Product includes Mxml under below license
Mini-XML License
The Mini-XML library and included programs are provided under the terms of the GNU Library
General Public License (LGPL) with the following exceptions:
1.Static linking of applications to the Mini-XML library does not constitute a derivative work and
does not require the author to provide source code for the application, use the shared Mini-XML
libraries, or link their applications against a user-supplied version of Mini-XML.
If you link the application to a modified version of Mini-XML, then the changes to Mini-XML must be
provided under the terms of the LGPL in sections 1, 2, and
2.You do not have to provide a copy of the Mini-XML license with programs that are linked to the
Mini-XML library, nor do you have to identify the Mini-XML license in your program or
documentation as required by section 6 of the LGPL.
This Product includes ISC DHCP under below ISC License
ISC License
Copyright © 2004-2011 by Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
Copyright © 1995-2003 by Internet Software Consortium
Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee
is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all
copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO
THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN
NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
312
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
This Product includes ppp below below license
PPP License
All of the code can be freely used and redistributed. The individual source files each have their own
copyright and permission notice. Pppd, pppstats and pppdump are under BSD-style notices. Some
of the pppd plugins are GPL'd. Chat is public domain.
This Product includes net-snmp below license
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate parts below. Please make sure
that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose
and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies
and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation,
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
313
Appendix G Legal Information
and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising
or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH
REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE
LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
314
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
315
Appendix G Legal Information
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054,
U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
316
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003-2009, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
317
Appendix G Legal Information
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the
names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
318
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or product
names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 8: Apple Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
319
Appendix G Legal Information
SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
---- Part 9: ScienceLogic, LLC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* Neither the name of ScienceLogic, LLC nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
320
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal InformationSafety Warnings
Safety Warnings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
Do not store things on the device.
Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points
or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact
your vendor for further information.
Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or
230V AC in Europe).
Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do not place the product where anyone can
walk on the power adaptor or cord.
Do not use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.
Do not attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of
electric shock from lightning.
Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord.
Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included
antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s).
If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged.
Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste
Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be
mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately.
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
321
Appendix G Legal InformationSafety Warnings
322
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Index
Index
MBS 75, 80
PCR 75, 79
QoS 75, 79, 83
SCR 75, 80
status 225
Numbers
802.1p 172, 174
activation
CWMP 200
dynamic DNS 178
DYNDNS wildcard 178
firewalls 143
MAC address filter 106
NAT 128
port binding 164
port forwarding 132
QoS 170, 171
SIP ALG 136
SSID 107
UPnP 188
VLAN 168
wireless LAN 99
scheduling 112
WPS 109
address mapping 133
rules 134
types 134, 135, 138
administrator password 22, 203
alerts 207
alternative subnet mask notation 253
antenna
directional 279
gain 279
omni-directional 279
anti-probing 142
AP (access point) 269
application filter 154
applications, NAT 138
asymmetrical routes 143
Asynchronous Transfer Mode, see ATM
ATM 225
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
authentication 114, 116
RADIUS server 116
WPA 104
backup
configuration 220
Basic Service Set, See BSS 267
Basic Service Set, see BSS
broadcast 70
BSS 117, 267
example 117
CA 274
CBR 75, 79, 83
Certificate Authority
See CA.
certifications 295
notices 296
viewing 297
channel 269
interference 269
channel, wireless LAN 114
CLI 15
client list 89
Command Line Interface, see CLI
compatibility, WDS 110
configuration
backup 220
CWMP 200
323
Index
DHCP 89
firewalls 142, 146
IP alias 91
IP precedence 172
IP/MAC filter 156
logs 207
port forwarding 130
reset 221
restoring 220
static route 161
WAN 71
wireless LAN 99
wizard 58
connection
nailed-up 78, 82
on demand 78
copyright 295
CPE WAN Management Protocol, see CWMP
CTS (Clear to Send) 270
CTS threshold 104, 114
customized services 147, 148
CWMP 199
activation 200
configuration 200
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP
dynamic WEP key exchange 274
DYNDNS wildcard 177
activation 178
EAP Authentication 273
encapsulation 69, 72, 78
ENET ENCAP 80
PPPoA 81
PPPoE 80
RFC 1483 81
encryption 99, 116, 275
WEP 100
key 101
WPA 103
authentication 104
reauthentication 103
WPA-PSK 102
pre-shared key 102
ENET ENCAP 72, 78, 80
ESS 268
Extended Service Set, See ESS 268
data fragment threshold 104, 114
default server, NAT 129, 131
Denials of Service, see DoS
DHCP 86, 89, 93
diagnostic 223
DiffServ Code Point, see DSCP
disclaimer 295
DNS 86, 89, 94, 185
documentation
related 2
Domain Name System, see DNS
DoS 141
DSCP 172
DSL connections, status 226
dynamic DNS 177
activation 178
wildcard 177
activation 178
324
FCC interference statement 295
filters 153
application 154
IP/MAC 156
structure 153
IP/MAC filter
configuration 156
MAC address 106, 115
activation 106
URL 153, 154
firewalls 141
actions 146
activation 143
address types 146
anti-probing 142
asymmetrical routes 143
configuration 142, 146
customized services 147, 148
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Index
default action 143
DoS 141
example 46
ICMP 142
packet direction 143
rules 144, 149
security 150
status 29
triangle route 143, 151
solutions 152
firmware 217
version 28
forwarding ports 128, 129
activation 132
configuration 130
example 130
rules 132
fragmentation threshold 104, 114, 270
FTP 15, 182
Guide
Quick Start 2
hidden node 269
IANA 258
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
see IANA
IBSS 267
ICMP 142, 185
IEEE 802.11g 271
IGA 136
IGMP 70, 86, 96
ILA 136
Independent Basic Service Set
See IBSS 267
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
initialization vector (IV) 276
Inside Global Address, see IGA
Inside Local Address, see ILA
Internet Control Message Protocol, see ICMP
Internet Group Multicast Protocol, see IGMP
Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6
IP address 70, 72, 78, 81, 85, 94
default server 129, 131
ping 223
private 95
IP alias 90
configuration 91
NAT applications 138
IP precedence 172, 174
configuration 172
IP/MAC filter 156
configuration 156
structure 153
IPv6 281
addressing 281
EUI-64 283
global address 282
interface ID 283
link-local address 281
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 281
ping 281
prefix 281
prefix length 281
stateless autoconfiguration 283
unspecified address 282
LAN 85
client list 89
DHCP 86, 89, 93
DNS 86, 89, 94
IGMP 86, 96
IP address 85, 86, 94
IP alias 90
configuration 91
MAC address 90
multicast 86, 96
RIP 86, 88, 95
status 29
subnet mask 86, 87, 94
325
Index
LEDs 18
example 137
global 137
IGA 136
ILA 136
inside 136
local 137
outside 136
P2P 129
port forwarding 128, 129
activation 132
configuration 130
example 130
rules 132
remote management 180
SIP ALG 135
activation 136
SUA 128
limitations
wireless LAN 117
WPS 124
Local Area Network, see LAN
login 21
passwords 21, 22
logs 207
alerts 207
settings 207
MAC address 90, 106
filter 98, 99, 106, 115
MAC address filter
activation 106
Management Information Base (MIB) 184
mapping address 133
rules 134
types 134, 135, 138
Network Address Translation
see NAT
Network Address Translation, see NAT
Maximum Burst Size, see MBS
Maximum Transmission Unit, see MTU
other documentation 2
MBS 75, 80, 83
MBSSID 118
MTU 75, 80
multicast 70, 86, 96
IGMPInternet Group Multicast Protocol, see IGMP
P2P 129
Multiple BSS, see MBSSID
packet direction 143
multiplexing 72, 78, 81
LLC-based 81
VC-based 81
Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 276, 277
passwords 21, 22
administrator 203
PBC 119
PCR 75, 79, 82
Peak Cell Rate, see PCR
nailed-up connection 73, 78, 82
PIN, WPS 109, 110, 119
example 121
NAT 78, 127, 136, 137, 257
activation 128
address mapping 133
rules 134
types 134, 135, 138
applications 138
IP alias 138
default server IP address 129, 131
326
port binding 163
activation 164
summary screen 165
port forwarding 128, 129
activation 132
configuration 130
example 130
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Index
rules 132
reset 19, 221
PPPoA 72, 78, 81
restart 221
PPPoE 72, 78, 80
restoring configuration 220
preamble 105, 114
RFC 1483 72, 78, 81
preamble mode 271
RIP 86, 88, 95
pre-shared key 102
Routing Information Protocol, see RIP
private IP address 95
probing, firewalls 142
RTS (Request To Send) 270
threshold 269, 270
product registration 297
RTS threshold 104, 114
PSK 276
rules, port forwarding 132
push button 17, 110
Push Button Configuration, see PBC
push button, WPS 119
safety warnings 321
schedules
wireless LAN 112
QoS 169
802.1p 172, 174
activation 170, 171
DSCP 172
example 169
IP precedence 172, 174
priority queue 175
SCR 75, 80, 83
security
network 150
wireless LAN 99, 114
Service Set IDentifier, see SSID
RADIUS 272
message types 273
messages 273
shared secret key 273
setup
DHCP 89
firewalls 142, 146
IP alias 91
IP precedenceQoS
IP precedence 172
IP/MAC filter 156
logs 207
port forwarding 130
static route 161
WAN 71
wireless LAN 99
wizard 58
RADIUS server 116
shaping traffic 82, 83
reauthentication, WPA 103
Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP
registration
product 297
Single User Account, see SUA
Quality of Service, see QoS
Quick Start Guide 2
related documentation 2
SIP ALG 135
activation 136
remote management 179
DNS 185
FTP 182
ICMP 185
NAT 180
WWW 181
SNMP 183
agents 183
Manager 183
managers 183
MIB 184
network components 183
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
327
Index
versions 183
SSID 98, 99, 108, 115
activation 107
MBSSID 118
static route 159
configuration 161
example 159
status 24, 27, 30
ATM 225
DSL connections 226
firewalls 29
firmware version 28
LAN 29
WAN 29
wireless LAN 29
WPS 109
triangle route 143, 151
solutions 152
UBR 75, 79, 84
unicast 70
Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP
upgrading firmware 217
SUA 128
UPnP 187
activation 188
cautions 187
example 189
installation 189
NAT traversal 187
subnet 251
URL 153
subnet mask 86, 94, 252
URL filter 154
URL 153
subnetting 254
Sustain Cell Rate, see SCR
system 203
firmware 217
version 28
LED 18
passwords 21, 22
administrator 203
reset 19
status 24, 27
firewalls 29
LAN 29
WAN 29
wireless LAN 29
time 204
VBR 83
VBR-nRT 75, 79, 84
VBR-RT 75, 79, 83
VCI 72, 78, 81
Virtual Channel Identifier, see VCI
Virtual Local Area Network, see VLAN
Virtual Path Identifier, see VPI
VLAN 167
activation 168
tagging frames 168
VPI 72, 78, 81
tagging frames 168
thresholds
data fragment 104, 114
RTS/CTS 104, 114
time 204
TR-069 15
trademarks 295
traffic shaping 82
example 83
328
WAN 69
ATM QoS 75, 79, 83
encapsulation 69, 72, 78
IGMP 70
IP address 70, 72, 78, 81
mode 72, 77
MTU 75, 80
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Index
multicast 70
multiplexing 72, 78, 81
nailed-up connection 73, 78, 82
NAT 78
setup 71
status 29
traffic shaping 82
example 83
VCI 72, 78, 81
VPI 72, 78, 81
warranty 297
note 297
WDS 110, 118
compatibility 110
example 118
web configurator 15, 21
login 21
passwords 21, 22
WEP 100, 116
key 101
Wide Area Network, see WAN
Wi-Fi Protected Access 275
WiFi Protected Setup, see WPS
wireless client WPA supplicants 276
Wireless Distribution System, see WDS
wireless LAN 97, 113
activation 99
authentication 114, 116
BSS 117
example 117
channel 114
configuration 99
encryption 99, 116
example 113
fragmentation threshold 104, 114
limitations 117
MAC address filter 98, 99, 106, 115
MBSSID 118
preamble 105, 114
RADIUS server 116
RTS/CTS threshold 104, 114
scheduling 112
security 114
SSID 98, 99, 108, 115
activation 107
status 29
WDS 110, 118
compatibility 110
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
example 118
WEP 100, 116
key 101
wizard 63
WPA 103, 116
authentication 104
reauthentication 103
WPA-PSK 102, 116
pre-shared key 102
WPS 108, 118, 121
activation 109
adding stations 110
example 122
limitations 124
PIN 109, 110, 119
push button 17, 110, 119
status 109
wireless security 271
Wireless tutorial 33
wizard 55
configuration 58
wireless LAN 63
WLAN
interference 269
security parameters 278
WPA 103, 116, 275
authentication 104
key caching 276
pre-authentication 276
reauthentication 103
user authentication 276
vs WPA-PSK 276
wireless client supplicant 276
with RADIUS application example 277
WPA2 275
user authentication 276
vs WPA2-PSK 276
wireless client supplicant 276
with RADIUS application example 277
WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 275
WPA2-PSK 275, 276
application example 277
WPA-PSK 102, 116, 275, 276
application example 277
pre-shared key 102
WPS 108, 118, 121
activation 109
adding stations 110
329
Index
example 122
limitations 124
PIN 109, 110, 119
example 121
push button 17, 110, 119
status 109
330
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
Index
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide
331
Index
332
AMG1302-T10A User’s Guide

Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : 
Description                     : 
Title                           : 
Creator Tool                    : 
Modify Date                     : 2012:05:15 14:26:30+08:00
Create Date                     : 2012:05:15 14:08:06+08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2012:05:15 14:26:30+08:00
Keywords                        : 
Producer                        : www.adultpdf.com
Document ID                     : uuid:54c80036-e913-4e07-837d-a4a0dcd9cdab
Instance ID                     : uuid:6a8d35b8-90a1-4d53-a4e3-92500706c6ce
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 332
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Subject                         : 
Author                          : 


EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

FCC ID Filing: I88AMG1302

 






Navigation menu